JP7423571B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable bodies and can perform a movable body performance in which the movable body is operated when a variable display of symbols is being performed.

In this type of gaming machine, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored after a power outage, there is an initial operation (long initial operation) that causes the movable body to operate in the same way as the production operation, and a movable body that performs the production operation. There are some devices that can perform an initial operation (short initial operation) in which some parts are omitted (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-113217

It is said that the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 does not sufficiently consider the case where the movable body effect is executed in the variable display of symbols that is started while the initial movement of the movable body is being performed. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably control the performance operations of the movable body.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The performance control means is capable of performing a motion promotion performance that prompts the player to perform a motion during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part (for example, the period from (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 50) until the movement promotion effect is executed;
a second part (for example, the result notification part in FIGS. 50 (D6) and (D7)) that is executed after the first part and in which the result of the movement promotion effect is notified;
It consists of
The movable body control means includes:
The confirmation movement control can be performed using a first movement control pattern in which the movable body is moved for a first period, and a second movement control pattern in which the movable body is moved in a second period shorter than the first period. can be,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the variable display ends before the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern starts, and then the power is turned on, the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern is in progress. It is possible to control the movable body so that the confirmation movement control is performed in the second movement control pattern and the confirmation movement control ends before the second part starts (for example, , if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed, the button notice (result notification part) will start. (See Figure 94)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the movement promotion performance is not obstructed by the movable body that operates under the confirmation movement control .

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. (A) is a diagram illustrating a variable display result designation command, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a gaming state background designation command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). FIG. 3D is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initial operation control processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of origin placement control processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of operation confirmation control processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of operation confirmation control processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of control during the execution period of confirmation control and control during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable body on the board is located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable body on the board is located at the production position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which it is located in the production position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the frame movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which they are located in the production position. It is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. (A) is a diagram showing performances that can be executed during the variable display period of SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of performances that can be executed in the jackpot game state. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of a pre-read movable body notice. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of a start notice. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of a movable body notice/pseudo continuous notice. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of reach notice/button notice. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of SP reach notice. It is a diagram showing an operation example of a jackpot performance. It is a diagram showing an operation example of a jackpot performance (promotion performance). It is a figure which shows the example of operation of state transition operation control. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of customer waiting demonstration performance. (A) is a diagram explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the aspects of lamps and sounds according to the operation of the movable body. (A) to (J) are diagrams illustrating an example of operation of operation confirmation control during cold start processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow when a power outage occurs. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow when a power outage occurs. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow when a power outage occurs. FIG. 3 is a timing chart when a movable object notice is executed after an initial operation due to a cold start. FIG. FIG. 7 is a timing chart when movable object notice is restricted during initial operation due to cold start. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a mode when a starting prize occurs during an initial operation due to a cold start. It is an explanatory view showing a mode when a starting prize occurs during an initial operation due to a cold start. FIG. 7 is a timing chart when a movable object notice is executed after an initial operation by hot start. FIG. FIG. 7 is a timing chart when movable object notice is restricted during initial operation due to cold start. FIG. FIG. 7 is a timing chart when movable object notice is restricted after the initial operation due to cold start. FIG. FIG. 7 is a timing chart in the case of restricting advance read movable body notice during initial operation due to cold start. FIG. It is a timing chart in the case where a starting prize occurs during the initial operation, and a variable 2 display for executing a movable body notice during the initial operation period is started in response to the starting winning. It is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated during the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable body notice from the initial operation period is started in response to the starting winning. It is a timing chart in the case where a starting prize is generated after the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable object notice is started during the initial operation period in response to the starting winning. It is a timing chart when a starting prize is generated during the initial operation, and a variable display that executes a movable body notice from the initial operation period is started in response to the starting winning. It is a timing chart of a case where the movable body moves to the performance position as an initial operation and a case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as the initial operation. When a movable body moves to a performance position as a performance action for a moving body notice, and when a movable body moves to a performance position as a performance action for a movable body notice. It is a timing chart of a movable body notice when the movable body stops on the way from the origin position to the performance position as an initial operation. 5 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation due to cold start. 5 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. 5 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. It is a timing chart of demonstration performance when the movable body stops on the way from the origin position to the performance position in the initial operation. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the jackpot fluctuation. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation when operation confirmation control is performed in a fanfare performance. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of one round game. It is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round game. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of operation confirmation control as a modification when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. It is a diagram showing an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round game. It is a figure which shows the example of operation of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on the fact that a power outage occurs during time saving and then the power is turned on. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the start notice is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the pseudo continuous notice is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on the fact that a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and then the power is turned on. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on a power outage occurring during a jackpot and then power being turned on. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on the fact that a power outage occurs during time saving and then the power is turned on. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of initial operation by cold start. They are a timing chart at the time of initial operation by cold start and a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. 5 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. 5 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. 5 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. 5 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. 5 is a timing chart at the time of initial operation by hot start. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. (A) to (D) are diagrams illustrating an example of operation of operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modification. (A) to (D) are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance operation of a success/fail button performance as a modified example. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when an error occurs in operation confirmation control.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(Characteristic part 132SG form)
[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The performance control means is
A movable body effect using the movable body can be executed during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, a movable body preview in which the movable body 32A on the board vibrates up and down can be executed),
It is possible to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the operation of the on-board movable body 32A). part),
The sound output means can output a movable body performance sound corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, in the movable body preview shown in FIG. 49, a portion where a performance sound effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs the operation shown in FIGS. 31 and 31). By executing the new operation confirmation control process shown in FIG. 32, the part that performs the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101),
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a performance movement control that moves the movable body by a predetermined operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 32A on the board (the part that moves up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position),
When the movable object effect is executed in a variable display that is started during a predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed at the time of power-on with initialization, the movable object effect is executed during the predetermined period. When the effect display is displayed and the movable body effect is executed after the predetermined period, at least the effect movement control and the output of the movable body effect sound are limited. The effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the above-frame movable body) A starting winning occurs during the initial operation period of the body 132SG101, and based on the starting winning, the above-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the movable body of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 are activated during the initial operation period. When the variable display for executing a notice is started, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as a movable body notice and the sound of the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body notice are performed during the execution period of the movable body notice. While the output is not executed, the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 61, the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, If a starting winning occurs after the initial operation period of the chance button 631B and the movable body 132SG101 on the frame, and a variable display that executes a movable body notice based on the starting winning starts, the movable body The movement of the on-board movable body 32A as a preview and the part where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
If the movable object effect is executed during the variable display that is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed at the time of power-on without initialization, the movable object effect is executed during the predetermined period. When the effect display is displayed and the movable object effect sound is output while the effect movement control is limited, and when the movable object effect is executed after the predetermined period, the effect movement control is limited. Display of the effect display and output of the movable body performance sound are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable body on the frame 132SG101, a starting winning occurs during the initial operation period, and based on the starting winning, these movable bodies on the board 32A, the movable body under the board 32B, the chance button 631B, the movable body on the frame If a variable display for executing a movable body notice is started during the initial operation period of the 132SG101, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as a movable body notice is not executed during the execution period of the movable body notice, while the image display device 5 At the same time, the effect display 132SG407 is displayed, and the moving object notification sound corresponding to the moving object notification from the speakers 8L and 8R is output, and as shown in FIG. When a starting prize occurs after the initial operation period of the upper movable body 32A, the lower panel movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame upper movable body 132SG101, and a variable display that executes a movable body notice based on the starting prize is started. , the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as a movable body notice during the execution period of the movable body notice, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the movable body notice sound corresponding to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a movable object effect is executed with a variable display that is started during confirmation movement control, the confirmation movement control is not obstructed by the effect movement control, and the player is provided with the movable object effect. It is possible to provide a game machine that can indicate that the game has been executed by displaying an effect or outputting sound produced by a movable body.

Type 1-2 gaming machines are
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the movable body presentation is executed than when it is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the expectation of jackpot is set higher than if it is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable object effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the movable object effect is executed during the predetermined period. When the effect movement control and the output of the movable body effect sound are limited, and after the end of the predetermined period, the effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed, while the output of the movable body effect sound is performed. is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, the initial operation period of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start) A variable display that executes a movable body notice during the initial operation period of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-the-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start win when a start win occurs during the start win. is started, the operation of the movable body 32A on the panel as a movable body notice and the output of the movable body notice sound corresponding to the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body notice. , After the initial operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 are completed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body notice is executed again, but from the speakers 8L and 8R. (The part where the output of the moving object warning sound in response to the moving object warning is not executed)
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable object effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, the movable object effect is executed during the predetermined period. When executed, the effect movement control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts hot) A starting prize occurs during the initial operation period of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 when started, and based on the starting prize, these on-board movable bodies 32A , If a variable display that executes a movable body notice is started during the initial operation period of the lower panel movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and frame upper movable body 132SG101, the board as a movable body notice during the execution period of the movable body notice. While the operation of the upper movable body 32A is not executed, after the initial operations of the upper movable body 32A, the lower panel movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame upper movable body 132SG101 are completed, the operation of the upper movable body 32A as a movable body notice is performed again. the part where the action is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the performance effect does not deteriorate due to the performance movement control remaining restricted in a movable body performance that is highly expected to be controlled in an advantageous state. .

Type 1-3 gaming machines are
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, above-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (for example, below-board movable body 32B),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means controls the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally. It is possible to perform the confirmation movement control that moves the (for example, the performance control CPU 120 and the part 31, the part that executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIG. 32),
The confirmation movement control ends based on the completion of the movement of the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. The initial operation of the movable body 132SG101 is the part that ends after the initial operation of the under-panel movable body 32B is completed),
The movable body performance is a performance using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable body preview is a performance that moves the movable body 32A on the board),
When the movable body effect is executed in a variable display that is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed when the power is turned on, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, When the effect movement control is limited and the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed, the effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 62, When the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a starting winning occurs during the initial operation period of the board movable body 32A, the bottom moving body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame moving body 132SG101, and based on the starting winning, these boards If the variable display that executes the movable body notice is started during the initial operation period of the upper movable body 32A, the lower panel movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame upper movable body 132SG101, the movable body will be displayed during the execution period of the movable body notice. (The part where the performance action of the on-board movable body 32A as a notice is not executed, and the performance action of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial action of the under-board movable body 32B is completed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed, the performance movement control using the first movable body is executed, so that it becomes difficult to distinguish between the confirmation movement control and the performance movement control. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not get lost.

Type 1-4 gaming machines are
When the power is turned on with initialization, the performance control means can execute an initialization notification corresponding to the initialization (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pachinko game machine 1 When started by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are made to emit light in a manner according to the initialization notification, and the speaker 8L is activated. , the part that outputs the initialization notification sound from 8R),
The execution period of the confirmation movable control and the execution period of the initialization notification overlap (for example, as shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. The initial operation period of the movable body 132SG101, the light emitting period in a manner according to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the panel bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the speaker 8L. , the part where the initialization notification sound output period from 8R overlaps),
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. The light emitting period of the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R, are the upper movable body 32A, the lower panel movable body 32B, and the chance button 631B. , a portion longer than the initial operation period of the frame movable body 132SG101),
If the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the execution period of the initialization notification after the execution period of the confirmation movement control has ended, the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification. When the physical performance is executed, the performance movement control and the effect display are performed, but the movable body performance sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the on-board movable body 32A Even if the variable display that executes the movable body notice is started during the initial operation of the lower panel movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame upper movable body 132SG101, the execution period of the movable body notice is different from that of each movable body. If it is after the end of the operation, the performance operation of the movable body 32A on the board and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 will be executed during the execution period of the movable body notice, but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the movable body on the board The LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the initialization correspondence notification, if the confirmation movement control is completed, the performance movement control is executed, and the game machine is provided which does not reduce the performance effect of the movable body performance. Can be done.

Game machines of form 1-5 are
The performance control means is capable of executing a pre-reading movable body performance that suggests that the movable body performance will be performed in a variable display prior to a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern in which the movable body performance is performed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the pre-read movable body notice),
When the pre-reading movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means can perform specific performance movement control that moves the movable body by a specific action (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, performance control The CPU 120 is a part that can move up and down multiple times between the origin position and an intermediate position by pre-reading the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body notice),
The execution period of the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body effect is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the initial movement period is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, the starting condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed, and the pre-reading movable object effect is executed with a variable display that is started based on the establishment of the starting condition. in the case where the pre-reading movable object effect is executed during the predetermined period, the specific movable control is limited;
If the variable display in which the pre-reading movable object effect was executed ends during the predetermined period, the specific movable control limited during the predetermined period is not performed after the predetermined period ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 68 In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start and variable display occurs multiple times during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial motion control, it is decided to execute the pre-read movable body notice. If the execution period of the pre-read movable body notice overlaps with the confirmation operation period and the initial motion control period of each movable body, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-read movable body notice. , after the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the movable body 32A on the board as a pre-read movable body notice is not executed again),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display is crossed, the specific movement control restricted during the confirmation movement control is not executed, so the player is not confused by moving the movable body excessively after the confirmation movement control is finished. We can provide gaming machines.

Game machines of form 1-6 are
In one variable display, the effect control means includes, as the movable object effect, a first movable object effect (for example, a first movable object notice shown in FIG. 69) and when executed than the first movable object effect. It is possible to perform a second movable body performance (for example, the second movable body notice shown in FIG. 69) that has a high rate of being controlled to the advantageous state,
The movable body control means includes:
When the first movable body effect is executed, a first effect movement control that moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation (for example, moves the on-board movable body 32A multiple times between the origin position and an intermediate position) part), and
When the second movable body effect is executed, a second effect movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined operation (for example, moves the on-board movable body 32A multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) part), and
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in one variable display that was started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the predetermined period. When the first movable body effect is executed during the period, the first effect movement control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed,
If the second movable body performance is executed before the limited first performance movement control is performed, the second performance movement control is performed without the first performance movement control being performed (for example, As shown in FIG. 69, if the initial motion of the movable body has already been executed during the execution period of the first movable body notice, the on-board movable body 32A is used as the first movable body notice after the initial motion of the movable body is completed. However, if the movement of the movable body 32A on the board as the second movable body notice has already been executed before the movement of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body notice, the first movable body (a part where the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as a second movable body notice is not executed and the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as a second movable body notice is continuously executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the performance effect does not deteriorate due to the movement of the movable body in the first movable body performance inhibiting the movement of the movable body in the second movable body performance. can.

Game machines of form 1-7 are
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-disk movable body LED 9e, frame on-movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A has an on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body 32B has an under-board movable body LED 9e, and the frame-on movable body 132SG101 has an on-board movable body LED 9e. body LED 9f, chance button 631B is provided with chance button LED 9g),
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, above-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (for example, below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control in which the second movable body is moved by a special operation to notify that the second movable body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45). , a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a determined performance that raises the underboard movable body 32B),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 , a portion that causes the under-panel movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 56(B), etc.) during the initial operation of the under-panel movable body 32B,
It is possible to perform special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control emits light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (E5), When the under-panel movable body 32B is raised, the control CPU 120 causes the under-panel movable body 9e to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, the portion that is emitted with the rainbow flash shown in FIG. 56 (B9)),
When the special effect movable control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, if the execution period of the fixed effect comes during the initial operation of each movable body after hot start) , a part that restricts the light emission (rainbow flash) of the underboard movable body LED 9e in a manner corresponding to the determined performance during the execution period of the determined performance),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special effect movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

Type 1-8 gaming machines are
The operation mode of the second movable body due to the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the second movable body due to the special effect movement control are common (for example, which is the initial operation and the effect operation of the underboard movable body 32B? (also the part that is the movement between the origin position and the production position),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), as shown in FIG. 61, the part where the production control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (flashing red),
The light emitting means of the second movable body that is movable by the special effect movable control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light in the first special light emission pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which light is emitted in a second special light emission pattern having a different light emission mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the performance control CPU 120 The part that causes the under-panel movable body LED 9e to flash a rainbow flash during operation, and when the under-panel movable body 32B is in contrast operation, causes the under-panel movable body LED 9e to emit a smooth rainbow light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

Game machines of form 1-9 are
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-board movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A is provided with the on-board movable body LED9d, and the under-board movable body 32B is provided with the on-board movable body LED9e). ),
As the confirmation movement control, the movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may As shown in FIG. 3, after the above-panel movable body 32A is operated as an initial operation, the under-panel movable body 32B is operated),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 A portion that causes the lower movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (for example, flashing red as shown in FIG. 56(B), etc.) during the initial operation of the lower movable body 32B,
When the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movable control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the light emitting means of the first movable body is moved. Perform specific light emission control (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, during the execution of the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the on-board movable body LED 9d emits light in an initial emphasis mode, and the under-board movable body LED 9e is initialized. The part that emits light in the warning mode),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that is being moved by confirmation movement control.

Game machines of form 1-10 are
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., production position),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position when the movable body is not placed at the initial position (for example, when the production control CPU 120 (the part that executes the origin placement control process shown),
When the variable display is started, it is possible to perform the return control (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
When the power is turned on, if the variable display starts during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the return control is limited (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the initial of each movable body If a starting winning occurs during the operation and a variable display based on the starting winning starts, the initial movement of each movable body is prioritized and executed over the movement of each movable body to its origin position),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which confirmation movement control is not interrupted by return control.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., production position),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position when the movable body is not placed at the initial position (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 (the part that executes the origin placement control process shown),
When the variable display ends and the game is in a waiting state, it is possible to carry out the return control (for example, as shown in FIG. 132SGS427 processing can be executed),
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the variable display ends during the predetermined period and the state is in the game standby state, the return control is executed. (For example, if a customer waiting demonstration performance is started in response to the end of a variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance of each movable body is given priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position.) part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which confirmation movement control is not interrupted by return control.

Game machines of form 1-12 are
The effect control means is capable of executing the movable object effect multiple times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, a first variable display notice and a second variable display notice are executed during one variable display). ),
When the movable body effect is executed in a variable display that is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed when the power is turned on, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, If the effect movement control is limited (for example, as shown in FIG. (1) The part where the performance movement of the movable body 32A on the board is not executed as a movable body notice),
One of the movable body performances executed multiple times in one variable display is executed, and the movement of the movable body by the performance movement control corresponding to the one movable body performance is successfully completed. If not, when the next movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control corresponding to the next movable body performance is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 71, the first movable body preview panel Even if the performance operation of the upper movable body 32A does not end normally, if the execution period of the second movable body notice comes, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a second movable body notice is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the performance movement control corresponding to one movable body performance does not end normally, the gaming machine is capable of retrying with the performance movement control corresponding to the next movable body performance. can be provided.

Game machines of form 1-13 are
The performance control means is configured to control a first movable body performance (e.g., a first movable body notice) as the movable body performance, and a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance. It is possible to perform a second movable body performance (for example, a second movable body notice),
The movable body control means includes:
When the first movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform first effect movement control that moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a first effect movement control as a first movable body notice). (a part in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and an intermediate position),
When the second movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a second performance movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined operation (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may perform a second movable body performance as a second movable body preview). (a part in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and an intermediate position),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable object effect and the second movable object effect are executed in the variable display that was started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the first movable object effect and the second movable object effect are executed during the predetermined period. When the first movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, each movable body If the execution period of the first movable body notice occurs during the initial operation, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body notice will not be executed during the execution period of the first movable body notice, and each movable body (The part where the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body notice is executed again after the initial operation),
When the first movable body is moving due to the limited first performance movement control, when the second movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is interrupted and the second performance movement control is performed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 72, if the execution period of the second movable body notice comes during the movement of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body notice in the initial movement of each movable body, (a part where the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a first movable body notice is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a second movable body notice is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the performance effect does not deteriorate due to the movement of the movable body in the first movable body performance inhibiting the movement of the movable body in the second movable body performance. can.

Game machines of form 1-14 are
The movable body is movable between an initial position (for example, an origin position) and an advanced position (for example, a production position),
a first detection means (for example, origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is placed at the initial position;
Further comprising a second detection means (for example, production position sensor 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is placed in the advanced position,
The confirmation movement control moves the movable body toward the advanced position over a first period based on the first detection means detecting that the movable body is placed at the initial position. , when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body is placed in the advanced position during the first period, the control moves the movable body toward the initial position (for example, FIG. 73 As shown in , the effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body toward the origin position when the effect position sensor does not detect the movable body during the first period),
The effect movement control moves the movable body toward the advanced position over a second period, and during the second period, it is detected by the second detection means that the movable body is placed in the advanced position. (For example, as shown in FIG. 74, the performance control CPU 120 stops the operation of the movable body when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the second period.) (the part that stops the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a movable body effect is executed during a game, even if the movable body corresponding to the movable body effect is not moved normally, the movement of the movable body is performed based on the confirmation movement control. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that can reduce the deterioration of the performance effect of a movable body performance that is not normally executed.

Game machines of form 1-15 are
The movable body control means includes:
If the movable body cannot operate normally for a specific period of time, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, the performance control CPU 120 , the part where if the movable body does not reach the production position as the initial movement, it is determined as a movement error and the initial movement is repeatedly executed),
If a predetermined number of motion errors are determined, it is possible to perform error movement control that moves the movable body for a longer movable period than the movable period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, , as shown in FIG. 75, the part in which the production control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial motion based on the fourth motion error determination (dead end determination),
When the error movement control is performed, when the movable body effect is executed, the effect movement control is limited, while the effect display and the movable body effect sound are output (for example, As shown in FIG. 75, in the movable body performance after a dead end determination, the motion of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, The part where the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner according to the movable body notice, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body notice is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in situations where the movable body cannot operate normally, and that does not reduce the performance effect of the movable body performance. can do.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
When the movable body is powered on, the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, performs a performance control). When the control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the above-board movable body 32A, the under-disk movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the part that performs the initial operation of the frame-top movable body 132SG101),
When the power is turned on, the effect control means can perform demonstration display control to display a demonstration display on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 (The part that displays the customer waiting demonstration effect)
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the demonstration display control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up after the power is cut off, the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed after the initial operation control of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control over a predetermined period of time (for example, the production control CPU 120 is a part that requires 30 seconds for the initial operation of each movable body),
The effect control means can perform the demonstration display control after a period at least as long as the predetermined period has elapsed after the confirmation movement control has ended (for example, after the initial movement of each movable body has ended). (The part where the customer waiting demonstration performance starts after 30 seconds)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not hindered because the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the confirmation movement control.

Type 2-3 gaming machines are
The performance control means is capable of performing the demonstration display control at different timings depending on whether the power is turned on with initialization or when the power is turned on without initialization (for example, when each movable The period from when the initial movement of the body ends until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start or a hot start).
The movable body control means includes:
It is possible to perform the above-mentioned confirmation movement control both when power is turned on with initialization and when power is supplied without initialization (for example, after the initial movement of each movable body is completed, the customer The period until the waiting demonstration effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start or a hot start).
When the power is turned on with initialization, controlling the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the demonstration display control is performed by the effect control means,
When the power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control ends before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means (for example, when the pachinko game machine Regardless of whether the period from the end of the initial movement of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance is different depending on whether 1 is started with a cold start or a hot start, each movable body (The part where the customer waiting demonstration performance is performed after the initial body movement)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether the power is turned on with initialization or the power is turned on without initialization, the visibility of the demonstration display is obstructed by the movable body that operates by confirmation movement control. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is free from being damaged.

Type 2-4 gaming machines are
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-disk movable body LED 9e, frame on-movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
Further comprising an operation means (for example, selection button 132SG35),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A has an on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body 32B has an under-board movable body LED 9e, and the frame-on movable body 132SG101 has an on-board movable body LED 9e. (The part where the body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g are provided for the chance button 631B),
The brightness of the light emitting means can be changed by operating the operating means (for example, by the performance control CPU 120 executing the volume/light amount adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, the various lamps 9a can be changed by operating the selection button 132SG35). The part where the light amount (brightness) can be adjusted up to 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is moving by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the performance control CPU 120 A portion that causes the lower movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (for example, flashing red as shown in FIG. 56(B), etc.) during the initial operation of the lower movable body 32B,
When the operating means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emitting means emitting light due to the specific light emission control is limited so that the brightness does not become based on the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 56(B) As shown, when the initial operation of each movable body is executed, the amount of light (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control is not changed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which there is no problem in confirming the operation of the movable body.

Type 2-5 gaming machines are
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-disk movable body LED 9e, frame on-movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
Further comprising an operation means (for example, selection button 132SG35),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A has an on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body 32B has an under-board movable body LED 9e, and the frame-on movable body 132SG101 has an on-board movable body LED 9e. (The part where the body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g are provided for the chance button 631B),
By operating the operating means, the brightness of the light emitting means can be changed (for example, by the performance control CPU 120 executing the volume/light amount adjustment process shown in FIG. 28, various lamps can be changed by operating the selection button 132SG35). The part where the light amount (brightness) can be adjusted from 9a to 9g),
The effect control means can display a changeable display indicating that the brightness of the light emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, The part where the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5),
Display of the changeable display is restricted during the predetermined period, and display of the changeable display is performed after the end of the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, during the initial operation of each movable body, the image display device 5, the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed, and the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the changeable display during the confirmation movement control, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the degree of attention to the confirmation movement control is not lost.

Type 2-6 gaming machines are
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, above-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (for example, below-board movable body 32B),
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-disk movable body LED 9e, frame on-movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the on-board movable body 32A is provided with the on-board movable body LED9d, and the under-board movable body 32B is provided with the on-board movable body LED9e). ),
As the confirmation movement control, the movable body control means moves the second movable body after moving the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the performance control CPU 120 The part in which the lower panel movable body 32B is operated after the upper panel movable body 32A is operated as an initial operation),
The light emission control means is capable of performing specific light emission control in which the light emission means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, A portion where the control CPU 120 causes the under-panel movable body 9e to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (for example, red blinking shown in FIG. 56(B), etc.) during the initial operation of the under-panel movable body 32B),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movable control, the specific light emission control by the light emission control means is not performed on the light emission means of the second movable body (for example, FIGS. 61 and 62 As shown in FIG. 3, when the on-panel movable body 32A performs the initial operation, the under-panel movable body LED 9e does not emit light in an initial emphasis mode).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that is being moved by confirmation movement control.

Type 2-7 gaming machines are
The performance control means is
During the demonstration display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that can execute the performance that operates between),
It is possible to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, a portion of the image display device 5 where an effect display 132SG407 is displayed),
The movable body control means includes:
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a movement control during a demonstration in which the movable body is moved in a common operation mode with the movement mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control). After the upper movable body 32A is moved from the origin position to the production position, the board movable body 32A is moved from the production position to the origin position),
If the movable body cannot operate normally for a specific period of time, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the confirmation movement control (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, the performance control CPU 120 , the part where if the movable body does not reach the production position as the initial movement, it is determined as a movement error and the initial movement is repeatedly executed),
If a predetermined number of motion errors are determined, it is possible to perform error movement control that moves the movable body for a longer movable period than the movable period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control (for example, , as shown in FIG. 79, the part where the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body as a special initial action based on the fourth action error determination (dead end determination),
When the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. In the customer waiting demonstration performance after the determination, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top The part where the movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner according to the movable body notice),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, and that does not reduce the performance effect of the demonstration display. be able to.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game in which the player is unable to enter, and
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The performance control means is capable of executing a fanfare performance during the advantageous state before being controlled by the round game,
The fanfare performance was
an introduction part (for example, an introduction part, see FIGS. 52 (F2) to (F6)) for notifying the advantageous state;
a firing direction reporting part (for example, a right-handed hitting reporting part; see FIGS. 52 (F7) to (F8)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the player of the firing direction of the game medium;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, if a power outage occurs immediately before execution of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the firing direction notification part starts. (For example, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the execution of a fanfare performance, a fanfare performance accompanied by the movement of the movable body 32A on the board (right-handed notification) (See Figure 80)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare performance is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
There are multiple types of advantageous states (for example, jackpots A to E),
In the introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the plurality of types of advantageous conditions the advantageous condition is, and as the notification, an advantageous condition name display (for example, jackpot type display) corresponding to the advantageous condition to be controlled is possible. 132SG421) and an introduction display before displaying the name of the advantageous state (for example, introduction display before displaying the jackpot type 132SG422) before the display of the name of the advantageous state is displayed.
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the display of the advantageous state name is performed. (For example, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation ends before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed in FIG. 52 (F6).)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if confirmation movement control is performed during a fanfare performance, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can grasp which advantageous state will be controlled.

Type 3-3 gaming machines are
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movable control emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using the specific light emission control and the fanfare light emission control, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is under confirmation movement control even during the fanfare performance.

Type 3-4 gaming machines are
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is being moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode). ,
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means is configured to control the first movable body when the first movable body is movable by the confirmation movable control when a power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter. The light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is made to emit light by the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moving, the first movable body The movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare production (introduction part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is under confirmation movement control even during the fanfare performance.

Type 3-5 gaming machines are
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light at a first brightness in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means is set to a second brightness to correspond to the fanfare performance during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movement control is performed. It is possible to perform light emission control in which the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance at the first brightness, during the operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b , a portion where the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, and the frame on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness; see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and reduce load when the power is turned on.

Type 3-6 gaming machines are
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-disk movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means moves the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movable control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the light emitting means of the first movable body is moved. Perform specific light emission control (For example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial emphasis mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial emphasis mode. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that is being moved by confirmation movement control.

Type 3-7 gaming machines are
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-disk movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body by a special operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed;
The light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the special effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, light is emitted in the first special light emission pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control to emit light in a second special light emission pattern having a different aspect (for example, when the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation is moved from the origin position to the production position). While emitting light in a common initial emphasis mode (white lighting) when retracting from the production position to the origin position, the movable body LED of the movable body operated by production operation control is emitted when the movable body is at the origin position. It is possible to emit light in different light emission modes when advancing from the direction to the production position and when retreating from the production position to the origin position (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

Type 3-8 gaming machines are
A light emitting means;
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
further comprising a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-disk movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the firing direction notification part,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control to move the movable body in an operation mode common to the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control. It is possible and
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed;
It is possible to perform special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is moved by the special effect movement control emits light in a special light emission pattern over an execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the firing direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, in the movable body production, the light is emitted in a mode different from the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) and corresponds to the right-handed hit notification part, and the sound output is limited when the movable body moves in the initial motion. , In the movable body performance performed in the right-handed notification part, the sound corresponding to the right-handed notification part is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special effect movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

Type 3-9 gaming machines are
Further comprising display means (for example, image display device 5),
The performance control means is
A movable body effect using the movable body (see FIG. 52 (F7)) can be executed in the firing direction notification part,
It is possible to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect on the display means,
The movable body control means includes:
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movement control that moves the movable body by a special operation,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the confirmation movement control again,
When the confirmation movement control is performed over the specific period, when the movable object effect is executed, the special effect movement control is limited, and the effect display is displayed (for example, a fanfare). When performing a movable body performance in the right-handed notification part of the performance, it is possible to move the movable body using a special operation, display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance, and ensure that the operation confirmation control is normal for a specific period of time. If the motion cannot be completed, it is determined that there is a motion error, and motion confirmation control can be performed again.If motion confirmation control is performed for a specific period of time, a movable object performance is executed. (at times, special operations are restricted while effect display is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by displaying an effect while preventing the confirmation movement control from being hindered by the special performance movement control. can.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) in which the movable body is moved by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally;
When notifying that the control is in the advantageous state, performance movement control is performed to move the movable body (for example, a movable body performance in a win/fail button performance) by an operation for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state. It is possible to
The light emission control means includes:
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a first brightness;
When the movable effect control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness,
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates are in the initial emphasis mode (white). 56 (B))
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game in which the player is in an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state), and
The performance control means is capable of executing a fanfare performance during the advantageous state before being controlled by the round game,
If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance by the performance control means and the power is turned on thereafter, the movable body control means is configured to control the confirmation movable body before the execution period of the fanfare performance ends. The movable body is controlled so that the control is completed (for example, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance is started, it is possible to respond to a round game) The part where the operation confirmation control ends before the round performance starts (see Figure 81),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the game machine, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set as the first brightness, so that the movable body does not operate due to glare. In addition, the confirmation movable control when the power is cut off and turned on at the same time as the fanfare performance is executed is ended within the execution period of the fanfare performance, so that the player can easily confirm the movable control. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine in which one can enjoy an advantageous state without worrying about the movable body that operates.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The effect control means controls the display in a case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and a case where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and then the power is turned on. It is possible to display a recovery indication (for example, recovery indication 132SG510) on the means,
The light emission control means is configured to control the light emission control means in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where the power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the fanfare effect and then the power is turned on. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery,
The movable body control means is configured to perform two types of operations: one in which a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and the other in a case in which a power outage occurs at the same time as the fanfare performance is executed and the power is turned on thereafter. It is possible to perform the confirmation movement control (for example, if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, or if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on). (parts where operation confirmation control can be performed in cases where
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processing at power-on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 4-3 is
When a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, the performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery indication (for example, restoration status display 132SG510) on the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
If a power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the fanfare performance, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control is turned off during the execution period of the fanfare performance. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light in a light emission pattern that corresponds to the display during recovery.
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery display (lights off)). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even during restoration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that is moved by the performance movement control.

The gaming machine of form 4-4 is
When a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, the performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery indication (for example, restoration status display 132SG510) on the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance during an execution period of the fanfare performance,
If a power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the fanfare performance, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery during the execution period of the fanfare performance. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the fanfare light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the light emission control is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the effect movement control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect). Portions that may be made to emit light (see Figure 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

Type 4-5 gaming machines are
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) when a power outage occurs during the fanfare production and the power is turned on thereafter;
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance during an execution period of the fanfare performance,
If a power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the fanfare performance, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery during the execution period of the fanfare performance. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during recovery is the light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery). (not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a fanfare performance is in progress before the power is cut off, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify that the machine is being restored when the power is turned on.

Type 4-6 gaming machines are
The operating mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operating mode of the movable body by the production movable control are common,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
The light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, a light emission mode is different from the first light emission pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control to emit light in different second special light emission patterns (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by production operation control (for example, from the origin position to This is common to the operation mode of moving to the production position), and the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the LED 9e on the bottom movable body, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the chance button 631B complete the initial operation in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until it is activated, and in the performance operation control (for example, a win/fail button performance), it emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the evacuation operation period), the part that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode that is different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or effect movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) in which the movable body is moved by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally;
When notifying that the control is in the advantageous state, performance movement control is performed to move the movable body (for example, a movable body performance in a win/fail button performance) by an operation for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state. It is possible to
The light emission control means includes:
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a first brightness;
When the movable effect control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness,
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates are in the initial emphasis mode (white). 56 (B))
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game in which the player is in an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state), and
The performance control means is capable of executing a fanfare performance during the advantageous state before being controlled by the round game,
The movable body control means is configured to cause the confirmation movable control to end before the easy-to-enter state ends if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter. Control the movable body (for example, end the operation confirmation control when the power is turned off and turned on immediately before the end of the fanfare performance before the opening control of the big prize opening in the first round game ends) (see Figure 82),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the game machine, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set as the first brightness, so that the movable body does not operate due to glare. In addition, when the power is cut off just before the fanfare performance ends, and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is ended before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (initial It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the attacker can aim to win even after the operation.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
In a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state for a prescribed period after the fanfare performance has ended, the performance control means controls a specific display area (for example, a right game area, a second route). ) is a launch direction instruction display (for example, right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430) that indicates the launch direction of the game medium, and a special display area is a round game related display regarding the round game (for example, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, It is possible to display the number of balls played (132SG453, number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.).
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the special display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction display, which has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
In the round game after the fanfare performance has ended, the performance control means displays a firing direction instruction display (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating a firing direction of the game media in a specific display area, and a special display area. It is possible to display the awarded gaming value display regarding the gaming value (for example, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls out display 132SG453, etc.),
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body with respect to the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the special display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction display, which has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movement control causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the round game. It is possible to perform medium light emission control,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the jackpot song (round effect). (see Figure 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves by the confirmation movement control even during a round game by using the specific light emission control.

The type 5-5 gaming machine is
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, it is possible to perform light emission control during a round in which the light emitting means of the movable body emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game. can be,
When the first movable body is moving by the confirmation movable control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light during the round. to emit light by control (for example, when the first movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), while the second movable body is movable. The part where the body LED emits light according to the mode corresponding to the jackpot song (round performance)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving by confirmation movement control even during a round game.

The gaming machine of form 5-6 is
The light emission control means includes:
In a round game after the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform light emission control during the round in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light by light emission control during the round,
The in-round light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on is the same as the light emission control during the round that is performed when a power outage does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare performance. The brightness is lower than the light emission control during the round (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the song (round performance) during the jackpot, when the fanfare performance ends A mode in which the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in initial operation corresponds to the jackpot song (round performance) in a round game when the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not start up with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before. (portions that may have lower luminance than the luminance when emitting light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

Type 5-7 gaming machines are
The operating mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operating mode of the movable body by the production movable control are common,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
The light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, a light emission mode is different from the first light emission pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control to emit light in different second special light emission patterns (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by production operation control (for example, from the origin position to This is common to the operation mode of moving to the production position), and the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the LED 9e on the bottom movable body, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the chance button 631B complete the initial operation in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until it is activated, and in the performance operation control (for example, a win/fail button performance), it emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the evacuation operation period), the part that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode that is different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or effect movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) in which the movable body is moved by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally;
When notifying that the control is in the advantageous state, performance movement control is performed to move the movable body (for example, a movable body performance in a win/fail button performance) by an operation for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state. It is possible to
The light emission control means includes:
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a first brightness;
When the movable effect control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness,
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates are in the initial emphasis mode (white). 56 (B))
During the advantageous state, the game control means can set the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which game media can enter;
The movable body control means is configured such that, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the easy-to-enter state is entered, and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movement control ends before the easy-to-enter state ends. Control the movable body (for example, perform operation confirmation control in the case where the power is cut off and the power is turned on immediately after the opening control of the big prize opening in the first round game is started). The part where it is possible to end the opening control of the grand prize opening before it ends (see Figure 85),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the gaming machine, by setting the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body as the first brightness, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from being dazzling. In addition, when the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state, the power is turned off and the power is turned on, and the confirmation movement control ends before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the attacker to win even after the initial action.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
Further comprising production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The effect control means is configured to control two cases in which a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state and then the power is turned on. It is possible to display a restoring indication (for example, restoring indication 132SG510) on the display means, depending on the case.
The light emitting control means is configured to operate in a case where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, depending on the case where
The movable body control means is arranged such that when a power cut occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power cut occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned confirmation movable control depending on the case where the variable display is in progress (for example, when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when the grand prize opening is controlled to be open) (The part where it is possible to perform operation check control when a power outage occurs at the same time and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processing at power-on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means may display a recovery indication (for example, a recovery indication 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-to-enter state of the variable means and the power is turned on thereafter. It is possible and
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
If a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on, the variable means is controlled from the easy-to-enter state to a non-enterable state in which game media cannot enter. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery over a period of
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights off) corresponding to the recovery display. (see Figure 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that is moved by confirmation movable control even during restoration.

The gaming machine of form 6-4 is
Further comprising production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The effect control means may display a recovery indication (for example, a recovery indication 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-to-enter state of the variable means and the power is turned on thereafter. It is possible and
The light emission control means includes:
In one round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state for a prescribed period, it is possible to perform light emission control during a round in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the first round game is started and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means corresponds to the recovery display for a period until the first round game ends. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light in the specified light emission pattern.
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the round (for example, during power outage recovery, the light emission brightness is lower than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the effect movement control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect). parts that may be made to emit light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify that restoration is in progress while suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the gaming machine.

The type 6-5 gaming machine is
Further comprising production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
When a power outage occurs during the control to bring the variable means into the easy-to-enter state and the power is turned on thereafter, the effect control means displays a recovery indication (for example, a recovery indication 132SG510) on the display means. It is possible to
The light emission control means includes:
In one round game in which the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state for a prescribed period, it is possible to perform light emission control during a round in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
If a power outage occurs at the same time as the first round game is started, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means corresponds to the recovery indication for a period until the first round game ends. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light in the specified light emission pattern.
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode (lights out) corresponding to the display during recovery is a round production (music during jackpot) (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a round game is in progress before the power is cut off, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify that the power is being restored when the power is turned on.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) in which the movable body is moved by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally;
When notifying that the control is in the advantageous state, performance movement control is performed to move the movable body (for example, a movable body performance in a win/fail button performance) by an operation for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state. It is possible to
The light emission control means includes:
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a first brightness;
When the movable effect control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness,
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates are in the initial emphasis mode (white). 56 (B))
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game in which the player is in an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state), and
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state in one round game, and then the power is turned on, the movable body control means is configured to control the movable body control means so that when the power is turned on immediately before the easy-to-enter state ends in one round game, the easy-to-enter state in the next round game ends. The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the first round (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the first round game) , the opening control period and the initial operation of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening of the opening in the second round (F10 (F10) (F10) are completed for the second time (F10) (see FIG. The part where the period is set (see Figure 86),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the game machine, the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body is set as the first brightness, so that the movable body does not operate due to glare. This prevents it from becoming difficult to confirm, and furthermore, the confirmation movable control when the power is turned off and turned on immediately before the end of the first round game is finished and confirmed before the end of the next round game. To provide a game machine in which a player can play a round game even after the movable control is finished.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
In a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state for a prescribed period after the fanfare performance has ended, the performance control means controls a specific display area (for example, a right game area, a second route). ) is a launch direction instruction display (for example, a right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430) that indicates the launch direction of the game media, and a special display area is a round game related display regarding the round game (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, It is possible to display the number of balls played (132SG453, number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.).
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the special display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction display, which has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-3 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
In the next round game that is started after the first round game ends, the performance control means displays a firing direction instruction display (for example, a right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430) that indicates the firing direction of the game medium in a specific display area; It is possible to display an assigned gaming value display regarding the gaming value assigned to the special display area (for example, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of pitched balls display 132SG453, etc.),
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the special display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction display, which has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-4 is
The movable body control means controls the variable means in the first round game when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state of the variable means in the first round game and the power is turned on thereafter. After the control to make the entry impossible is performed, the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control (see FIG. 86);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 7-5 is
The operating mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operating mode of the movable body by the production movable control are common,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
The light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, a light emission mode is different from the first light emission pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control to emit light in different second special light emission patterns (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by production operation control (for example, from the origin position to This is common to the operation mode of moving to the production position), and the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the LED 9e on the bottom movable body, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the chance button 631B complete the initial operation in the operation confirmation control. It emits light in an initial emphasizing mode (white lighting) until it is activated, and in the performance operation control (for example, a win/fail button performance), it emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advance operation period), and in the second period ( For example, during the evacuation operation period), the part that emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, performing confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally;
When notifying that it will be controlled to the advantageous state, a performance movement control that moves the movable body by an operation to notify that it will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a movable body performance in a win/fail button performance or a promotion performance) ) and
The light emission control means includes:
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a first brightness;
When the movable effect control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness,
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates are in the initial emphasis mode (white). 56 (B))
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game in which the player is in an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state), and
If a power outage occurs at the same time as the control to the inaccessible state in one round game and the power is turned on thereafter, the movable body control means controls the confirmation movable body before the inaccessible state ends. The movable body is controlled so that the control is completed (for example, after a power outage occurs just before the opening control of the big prize opening in the third round game is completed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start) If the third special round interval period ends (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)), the opening control of the grand prize opening and the round The part where the interval period and initial operation period are set (see Figure 87),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the gaming machine, by setting the brightness of the light emitting means provided on the movable body as the first brightness, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from being dazzling. In addition, when the variable means becomes inaccessible in one round game, the power is cut off and the power is turned on, and the next round game ends. To provide a game machine in which a player can play a round game even after confirmation movement control is finished.

The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
Further comprising production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The effect control means is configured such that when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on. It is possible to display a recovery indication (for example, recovery indication 132SG510) on the display means, depending on the case.
The light emission control means is configured to be configured such that a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, depending on the case.
The movable body control means is configured to operate when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and at the same time when the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, a power outage occurs and then the power is turned on. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned confirmation movable control in both cases (for example, when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when the grand prize opening is controlled to be open). (The part where it is possible to perform operation check control when a power outage occurs at the same time and then the power is turned on)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processing at power-on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 8-3 is
Equipped with production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The performance control means is configured to display a recovery status display on the display means (for example, when a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state in the first round game and the power is turned on). It is possible to display the middle display 132SG510),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
If, in the first round game, a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, and then the power is turned on, the next round game after the end of the first round game is started. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery over a period of
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (lights off). (See Figure 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that is moved by confirmation movable control even during restoration.

The gaming machine of form 8-4 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is
In the first round game, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, and then the power is turned on, a restoring display (for example, restoring display 132SG510) is displayed on the display means. It is possible to
In the first round game, when the variable means is controlled to be inaccessible, an interval effect can be executed;
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform interval light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval effect during an execution period of the interval effect;
If, in the first round game, a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, and then the power is turned on, the next round game after the end of the first round game is started. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery over a period of
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the interval (for example, during power restoration, the light emission brightness is lower than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the effect movement control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect). (parts that may be made to emit light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify that restoration is in progress while suppressing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the gaming machine.

The form 8-5 gaming machine is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is
In the first round game, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, and the power is turned on after that, the display means displays a message indicating that recovery is in progress (e.g., It is possible to display the middle display 132SG510),
In the first round game, when the variable means is controlled to be inaccessible, an interval effect can be executed;
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform interval light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval effect during an execution period of the interval effect;
If, in the first round game, a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state, and then the power is turned on, the next round game after the end of the first round game is started. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery over a period of
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the interval effect (for example, the mode (lights off) corresponding to the display during recovery is the mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery), which is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery. (portions that are not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the mode),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify that it is being restored when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 8-6 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing an interval performance that notifies whether or not the variable means is controlled to be in a special state when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
a result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The confirmation movement control is a control that moves the movable body so as to complete the operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part starts.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval performance is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 8-7 is
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
Further comprising a production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing an interval performance that notifies whether or not the variable means is controlled to be in a special state when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
a result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control to move the movable body in an operation mode common to the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control. It is possible and
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is moved by the special effect movement control emits light in a special light emission pattern over an execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body performance when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, in the result notification part, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion effect (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, the operation is performed by operation confirmation control. It is possible to perform production operation control in the same operating mode as the operating mode of the under-board movable body 32B, and the sound output is limited by operation confirmation control when the under-board movable body 32B operates, and in the movable body performance. (a part where a sound corresponding to the movable body effect is output when the underboard movable body 32B operates),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 8-8 is
Further comprising production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing an interval performance that notifies whether or not the variable means is controlled to be in a special state when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)),
a result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is
In the result notification part, it is possible to perform a movable body effect (see FIG. 53 (F24)) using the movable body,
It is possible to display an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body effect on the display means,
The movable body control means includes:
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform special effect movement control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the movement mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the confirmation movement control again,
In the first round game in which the interval performance is executed, a power outage occurs immediately before the control is made to the inaccessible state, and the confirmation movement control that is started when the power is turned on thereafter does not end normally. In this case, the timing at which a motion error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable object effect is executed during the specific period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special effect movement control is restricted and the effect display is displayed (for example, if the movement confirmation control is not specified), the effect display is displayed. If the game cannot be completed normally for a period of time, it will be determined as an operation error and the operation confirmation control will be performed again, and the big prize opening will be closed in the first round game where the interval performance is executed. If a power outage occurs immediately before the state is controlled, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on after that does not end normally, the timing at which an operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect. However, if the promotion effect is executed during a specific period during which operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable object effect may be restricted while the effect display may be displayed).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by displaying an effect while preventing the confirmation movement control from being hindered by the special performance movement control. can.

Type 8-9 gaming machines are
The operating mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operating mode of the movable body by the production movable control are common,
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control is caused to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed;
The light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the effect movement control is caused to emit light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and in a second period after the end of the first period, a light emission mode is different from the first light emission pattern. It is possible to perform the special light emission control to emit light in a different second special light emission pattern (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d of the movable body, the under-disk movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B are activated. In the confirmation control, the light is emitted in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed, and in the performance operation control (for example, in the case of a successful promotion of the promotion performance), in the first period (for example, the advancement operation period). is a part that emits light in a rainbow flash mode, and in the second period (for example, the evacuation operation period), it emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or effect movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game in which the player is in an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state), and
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The performance control means is capable of executing a notification performance (for example, promotion performance) that notifies which of the advantageous states is in a specific round game in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state,
The above announcement performance is
Introduction part (for example, see Figures 53 (F21) to (F23)),
a result notification part (for example, see FIGS. 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the results of the introduction part;
It consists of
If it is the first advantageous state, an effect corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
If it is the second advantageous state, an effect corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on thereafter, the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control before the result notification part starts. The movable body is controlled so that the pachinko machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the opening control of the big prize opening in the second round game ends. In this case, the opening control of the grand prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round game starts. (see Figure 89),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification effect is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
In a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state for a prescribed period after the fanfare performance has ended, the performance control means controls a specific display area (for example, a right game area, a second route). ) is a launch direction instruction display (for example, right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430) that indicates the launch direction of the game medium, and a special display area is a round game related display regarding the round game (for example, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, It is possible to display the number of balls played (132SG453, number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.).
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the special display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction display, which has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
In the specific round game, the performance control means displays a firing direction instruction display (for example, a right-handed promotion display 132SG430) indicating the firing direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) and a special display area. It is possible to display a given gaming value display regarding the given gaming value (for example, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of pitched balls display 132SG453, etc.),
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the special display area (see FIGS. 83 and 84);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction display, which has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-4 is
a light emitting means;
Further comprising: a light emission control means;
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moved by the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part). (See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is under confirmation movement control even during the notification performance by the specific light emission control and the notification light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 9-5 is
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on thereafter, notification light emission control is performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to a notification effect. is possible,
The light emission control means is configured to control when the movable body is moving due to the confirmation movable control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on thereafter. The light emitting means of the device is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control (for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round game and the power is turned on thereafter, the movable body is not moved by the operation confirmation control). When the movable body that initially operates, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are not in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), but in the initial emphasis mode ( (white lighting)) (see Figure 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and reduce load when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-6 is
a light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification effect,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and then the power is turned on, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light by the notification light emission control,
The notification light emission control, which is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific round game starts and the power is turned on thereafter, is performed when the power outage occurs immediately before the specific round game starts. The brightness is lower than the notification light emission control that is performed when there is no operation (for example, the operation confirmation control is started during the second round interval period or the third round game, and the on-board movable body LED 9d of the movable body that initially operates , the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the portions that emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in performance operation control (promotion performance). 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and reduce load when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 9-7 is
The performance control means is capable of executing an action promotion performance that prompts the player to perform an action during the execution period of the notification performance (see FIG. 53 (F23));
The movement promotion effect is executed in the introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)),
The movable body control means may terminate the confirmation movable control before the introduction part starts if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and then the power is turned on. (For example, the operation promotion part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round game, that is, the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B is started.) (the part where the initial movement of the movable body ends before the movement),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the movement promotion performance in the introduction part is not obstructed by the movable body that operates under the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 9-8 is
A light emitting means;
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
further comprising a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)),
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means may perform special effect movement control to move the movable body in an operation mode common to the operation mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control. It is possible and
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is moved by the special effect movement control emits light in a special light emission pattern over an execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body performance when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control. (For example, when performing initial operation, the lower panel movable body LED 9e emits light in a mode corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis mode; white lighting), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited and When performing a performance, the movable LED 9e under the board emits light in a mode (for example, a rainbow mode) corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part), while emitting light in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part). the part where sound effects are output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by specific light emission control and special light emission control.

The gaming machine of form 9-9 is
The performance control means is
A movable body performance using the movable body can be executed in the result notification part,
It is possible to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect on the display means,
The movable body control means includes:
When the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform special effect movement control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the movement mode of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is possible to determine that an operation error has occurred and perform the confirmation movement control again,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the confirmation movement control that is started when the power is turned on thereafter does not end normally, the timing at which an operation error is determined is as described above. It overlaps with the execution period of the moving body performance,
If the movable object effect is executed during the specific period during which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special effect movement control is restricted and the effect display is displayed (for example, if the movement confirmation control is not specified), the effect display is displayed. Immediately after the third round performance starts when the promotion performance is executed, it is possible to determine that it is an operation error and perform operation confirmation control again if it cannot be completed normally for a period of time. When a power outage occurs and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which an operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and the operation confirmation control is If the promotion effect is executed during the specific period in which it is being performed, the movable body effect may be restricted while the effect display may be displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that the movable body performance has been executed by displaying an effect while preventing the confirmation movement control from being hindered by the special performance movement control. can.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game multiple times in which the player is in an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state), and
The performance control means is capable of executing an ending performance after the final round game ends (see FIG. 52 (F12) to (F14)),
The ending performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 52 (F12) and Figure 53 (F31)),
A special state notification part that is executed after the introduction part and provides notification regarding a special state that is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state notification part; see FIG. 52 (F13), FIG. 53 (F32), and (F34)). and,
It consists of
The movable body control means is configured to control the movable body control means before the special state notification part starts when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state in the final round game and the power is turned on thereafter. Control the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the 10th final round game, During the ending period, the ending period and the initial The part where the operation period is set (see Figure 90),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special state notification part in the ending performance is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state in the final round game and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control is set to the ending effect. It is possible to perform ending light emission control to emit light with the corresponding lamp pattern,
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is a part that is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part). (See Figure 56(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using the specific light emission control and the ending light emission control, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is under confirmation movement control even during the ending performance.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state in the final round game and the power is turned on afterwards, ending light emission control that causes the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect. It is possible to do
The movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means controls the first movable body to be movable by the confirmation movable control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state in the final round game and the power is turned on thereafter. When, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emission control, and the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the ending light emission control (for example, when the movable body that is initially operated is movable on the board) The body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), while the movable body LEDs of other movable bodies that are not in operation display the ending effect (introduction). (See FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving by confirmation movement control even during the ending performance.

The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
A light emitting means;
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means includes:
When the ending effect is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state in the final round game and the power is turned on thereafter, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light by the ending light emission control,
The ending light emission control, which is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-to-enter state in the final round game and the power is turned on afterwards, is performed so that the power outage does not occur immediately before the end of the ending performance. (For example, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the brightness is lower than the ending light emission control that is performed when the movable body is initially operated. The movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light at low brightness in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), not in a mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and reduce load when the power is turned on.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A light emitting means;
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body is provided with the light emitting means (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) in which the movable body is moved by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally;
When notifying that the control is in the advantageous state, performance movement control is performed to move the movable body (for example, a movable body performance in a win/fail button performance) by an operation for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state. It is possible to
The light emission control means includes:
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a first brightness;
When the movable effect control is performed by the movable body control means, the light emitting means is controlled so that the brightness of the light emitting means becomes a second brightness,
The first brightness is lower than the second brightness (for example, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates are in the initial emphasis mode (white). 56 (B))
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game multiple times in which the player is in an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state), and
The performance control means is capable of executing an ending performance after the final round game ends,
If a power outage occurs immediately after the ending effect is started by the effect control means and the power is turned on thereafter, the movable body control means is configured to control the confirmation movable body before the execution period of the ending effect ends. The movable body is controlled so that the control ends (for example, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance, during the ending period, the movable body is The ending period and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body ends before the time-saving state notification part (see FIGS. 53 (F32) and (F34)) in which information is notified starts. (see Figure 91),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the power consumption when the power is turned on is suppressed, the load on the gaming machine is reduced, the power is cut off at the same time as the ending effect is executed, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is performed within the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can play in a high base state without worrying about the movable body being operated by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is
The effect control means controls the display depending on the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and the case where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending effect and then the power is turned on. It is possible to display a recovery indication (for example, recovery indication 132SG510) on the means,
The light emission control means is configured to control the light emission control means in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where the power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the ending effect and then the power is turned on. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery,
The movable body control means is configured to perform two cases: a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and a power outage occurs at the same time as the ending performance is executed, and the power is turned on thereafter. It is possible to perform the above confirmation movement control (for example, if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, or if a power outage occurs at the same time as the grand prize opening is controlled to be open) , after that, when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processing at power-on is prevented from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a recovery indication (for example, recovery indication 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending effect and the power is turned on thereafter;
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is movable by the confirmation movable control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial emphasis mode);
If a power outage occurs at the same time as the ending effect is executed by the effect control means, and then the power is turned on, the light emitting means is set to a light emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display during the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light with
The light emission mode used in the specific light emission pattern is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display (for example, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights off) corresponding to the recovery display. (see Figure 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that is moved by confirmation movable control even during restoration.

The gaming machine of form 11-4 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a recovery indication (for example, recovery indication 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending effect and the power is turned on thereafter;
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform ending light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect during the execution period of the ending effect,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the ending effect and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery during the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the ending light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the light emission control is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the effect movement control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect). Portions that may be made to emit light (see Figure 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption and reduce load when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 11-5 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying a recovery indication (for example, recovery indication 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending effect and the power is turned on thereafter;
The light emission control means includes:
It is possible to perform ending light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect during the execution period of the ending effect,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the execution of the ending effect and the power is turned on thereafter, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery during the execution period of the ending effect. It is possible to control light emission,
The light emission mode used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ending effect (for example, the light emission mode (lights out) corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the ending effect (ending introduction). Portions that are not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the corresponding mode (see FIG. 56(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify that restoration is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the ending performance is in progress before the power is cut off.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The specific identification information includes first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, a second special symbol),
The normal state is a state in which variable display of the first identification information is likely to be executed,
The special state is a state in which variable display of the second identification information is likely to be executed,
During the special state, information regarding the advantageous state (for example, number of consecutive hits/total number of pitched balls displayed 132SG454) can be displayed in a first display area of the display means,
During the special state, pending information regarding the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second pending storage number and the second pending display 132SG002) can be displayed in a second display area of the display means,
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on;
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the second display area more than the first display area (for example, if a power outage occurs during the time saving After that, if the initial operation is performed when the hot start is started and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A will display the second pending memory number (display area 5SL) or the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012). The time during which it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the player is made shorter than the time during which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454). (See Figure 92), where each movable body is set to perform its initial movement.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body operated by confirmation movement control and has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed more than the first display area.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is
The information regarding the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while the pending information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (e.g. The number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, while the second pending memory number (display area 5SL) and the second pending display 132SG002 change due to changes in the number of winnings, pre-read notices, etc. even in the time-saving state. (parts whose display mode can be changed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of pending information, which may change due to the movable body operated by confirmation movement control, is less obstructed than information regarding an advantageous state that does not change.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is
The range in which the movable body, which is movable by the confirmation movable control, overlaps the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body, which is movable by the confirmation movable control, overlaps the second display area (for example, Due to the initial operation, the on-board movable body 32A is set to the number of consecutive games than the range where the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the display area 5SL of the second pending storage number and the second pending display area 132SG012 of the second pending display 132SG002. /Total ball count display 132 The part that overlaps with the display area of SG454 is larger),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body operated by confirmation movement control and has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed more than that of the first display area.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The performance control means is capable of performing a motion promotion performance that prompts the player to perform a motion during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part (for example, the period from (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 50) until the movement promotion effect is executed;
a second part (for example, the result notification part in FIGS. 50 (D6) and (D7)) that is executed after the first part and in which the result of the movement promotion effect is notified;
It consists of
The movable body control means is configured to control the movable body control means before the second part is started if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is turned on thereafter. The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed (for example, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the button notice is executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started). When activated, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation is completed before the button notification (result notification part) starts (see Figure 94),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the movement promotion performance is not obstructed by the movable body that operates under the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (for example, CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command that designates execution of a button notice) to the performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of performing the operation promotion performance based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means may change the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation starts and the power is turned on thereafter. possible (for example, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with button notice) is received within a specified time (e.g. 4000ms) after receiving a power failure recovery designation command, the initial operation being executed (A portion where it is possible to interrupt the initial motion (approximately 20 seconds) and switch to a shortened initial motion whose duration is shorter than the initial motion being executed (for example, 5 seconds),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into account the start of a specific variation.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The effect control means is capable of executing a start effect (for example, a start notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started;
The start performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 48 (B2) to (B6)),
a result notification part (see FIGS. 48 (B3a) to (B6a)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the results of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means is configured to control the movable body control means before the result notification part starts when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is turned on thereafter. The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed (for example, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the start notice is executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a hot start). (See Figure 95).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the start performance is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (for example, CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command that specifies execution of a notice at the time of start) to the performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of performing the start performance based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means may change the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation starts and the power is turned on thereafter. (For example, based on a specific performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial motion so that the initial motion is completed by the time the result notification part of the start notice is started. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into account the start of a specific variation.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The performance control means is capable of variably displaying the identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and after once stopping the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the identification information is executed again. It is possible to perform a re-variable display notification effect (for example, a pseudo continuous notice) to notify the
The re-variable display notification effect is
An introduction part (see FIGS. 49 (C3) to (C5)) that incites whether or not the re-variable display of identification information is executed;
a result notification part (see FIGS. 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the results of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means is configured to control the result notification part from starting when a power outage occurs immediately before the variable display of the identification information based on the specific variable display pattern starts and the power is turned on thereafter. The movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is terminated before the confirmation motion control is completed (for example, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the pseudo continuous notice is executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 When activated by hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation is completed before the pseudo continuous notification (result notification part) starts (see Figure 96),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification performance is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (for example, CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning performance designation command that designates execution of a pseudo continuous notice) to the performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of performing the re-variable display notification performance (for example, a pseudo continuous notice) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means may change the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific fluctuation starts and the power is turned on thereafter. (For example, based on a specific performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial motion so that the initial motion is completed by the time the pseudo continuous announcement result notification part starts. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into account the start of a specific variation.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The normal state is a state designed to eject gaming media toward the first gaming area (for example, the left gaming area),
The special state is a state designed to eject gaming media toward the second gaming area (for example, the right gaming area),
In the normal state, the display means displays a first game area side firing promotion display (for example, a left-handed hitting promotion display) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) that urges the first game area to fire the game medium. 132SG530), and a display corresponding to the normal state can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the predetermined display area (for example, if there is a power outage during variable display in the normal state). After this occurs, if the initial operation is performed when the hot start is started and the recovery is performed, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 and becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. (see Figures 97 and 98),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not obstructed by the movable body operated by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a restoring display (for example, restoring display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is turned on thereafter;
It is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left-handed play promotion display 132SG530) when the restoration-in-progress display is displayed;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably notify the firing direction of gaming media even during restoration.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is
As the first gaming area promotion notification, it is possible to display a first gaming area promotion notification display (for example, left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530) and output a first gaming area promotion notification sound,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output. limited,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first gaming area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first gaming area promotion notification sound is output. (For example, while the left-handed batting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, the left-handed batting operation promotion notification sound is limited, and the operation is confirmed based on the fact that it started with a hot start after a power outage occurred.) When control is performed, a left-handed batting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, and a left-handed batting operation promotion notification sound is output),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable first game area promotion notification that takes into consideration the situation at the time of power-on.

The gaming machine of form 16-4 is
When game media enters a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41, etc.) provided on the second game area side in the normal state, the first game area promotion notification (for example, left-handed play promotion display 132SG530) is performed. It is possible to
It is possible to perform a special first gaming area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first gaming area promotion notification based on the fact that a specific number of gaming media have entered the predetermined area in the normal state,
It is possible to perform the special first game area promotion notification for a period longer than the period in which the movable body is movable by the confirmation movable control (for example, when a specific number of game balls ( For example, it is possible to perform a special left-handed batting operation promotion notification that has a higher priority than the left-handed batting operation promotion notification based on the fact that the movable body has entered (for example, 5 pieces). It is possible to perform special left-handed batting operation promotion notification for a longer period than 20 seconds).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the special first game area promotion notification is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
Comprising a game control means (for example, CPU 103),
During the advantageous state, the game control means puts the variable means (for example, the special variable prize winning ball device 7) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) into which the game medium can enter, and then changes the variable means to the game medium. It is possible to play a round game in which the player is in an inaccessible state (for example, a closed state), and
The display means is
If a power outage occurs during the round game and the power is turned on after that, a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
After that, in the predetermined display area, displays corresponding to the round game (for example, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls played 132SG453, number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) are displayed. is possible,
When displaying either the display corresponding to the round game or the recovery display, displaying a firing direction instruction display (for example, a right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430) indicating the firing direction of the game medium in a specific display area;
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the predetermined display area (for example, if the movable body is not overlapped with the specific display area during a round game in a jackpot game state) If the initial operation is performed when the system is restarted and recovered after a hot start occurs, the on-board movable body 32A displays information corresponding to the round game (for example, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of winning balls displayed 132SG452, Right-handed hit promotion displayed in operation confirmation control rather than being superimposed on the front side of a predetermined area (see FIG. 83(A)) where pitch count display 132SG453, number of consecutive shots/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. A part that operates so as not to overlap the front side of the display 132SG430 (see FIGS. 99 and 100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction display, which has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable under the predetermined movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movement control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movement control (for example, when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state). The initial operation is performed in an operation mode that includes the movement of the movable body notice (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps the right-hand hit promotion display 132SG430, After a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, the initial action when the power is turned on is the performance action in the movable body notice that overlaps with the right-hand hit promotion display 132SG430 (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
The display means is
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on afterwards, it is possible to display a recovery indication (for example, recovery indication 132SG510).
As the restoration display, text information indicating that restoration is in progress can be displayed in a predetermined display area;
It is possible to display a firing direction instruction display (for example, a right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430) indicating the firing direction of the game medium in a specific display area together with the restoration display,
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the predetermined display area (for example, if the movable body is not overlapped with the specific display area during a round game in a jackpot game state) If the initial operation is performed when the system is restarted and recovered after a hot start occurs, the movable body 32A on the panel will be displayed in the operation confirmation control rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. A part that operates so as not to overlap on the front side of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 (see FIGS. 99 and 100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction, which has a high influence on the game with a movable body operated by confirmation movement control, is less obstructed than the textual information indicating that recovery is in progress. .

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
Further comprising production control means (for example, production control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control that moves the movable body by a predetermined operation,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined effect movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state). The initial operation at the time is performed in an operation mode that includes the movement of the movable body notice (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hand hit promotion display 132SG430, while during the jackpot After a power outage occurs during the variable display in the or time-saving state, the initial action when the power is turned on is the performance action in the movable body notice that overlaps with the right-hand hit promotion display 132SG430 (returning between the origin position and the intermediate position). (a part that is performed in a manner that does not include a movement),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control that moves the movable body by a special operation,
The movable body that is movable by the special movable control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
The confirmation movement control can move the movable body in a manner including the special operation in the special movement control,
The movable body, which is movable by the confirmation movable control performed when power is turned on after a power outage occurs during the advantageous state, is movable by the special movable control for a period during which it stays in the predetermined display area. The time the movable body stays in the predetermined display area is longer (for example, the time the underboard movable body 32B stays at the presentation position that overlaps with the recovery display 132SG510 is longer than the time the movable body 32B stays in the presentation position that overlaps with the recovery display 132SG510 during the initial operation) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a power outage occurs during an advantageous state and the movable body is not superimposed on a predetermined display area for a long period of time due to confirmation movement control that is performed when the power is turned on, recovery is possible. It is possible to provide a game machine that does not cause any trouble in determining whether or not it is inside.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, normal gaming state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means is
When a power outage occurs during the special state and the power is turned on thereafter, a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area;
After that, it is possible to display a display corresponding to the special state in the predetermined display area,
When displaying either the display corresponding to the special state or the recovery display, displaying a firing direction instruction display (for example, a right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430) indicating the firing direction of the game medium in a specific display area;
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body in the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the predetermined display area (for example, if there is a power outage during the variable display in the time saving state). After the occurrence, if the initial operation is performed when the hot start is started and the recovery is performed, the movable body 32A on the board displays information corresponding to the time saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, remaining time saving display 132SG201, number of consecutive games) The right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 that is displayed during operation confirmation control is displayed rather than being superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see FIGS. A part that operates so as not to overlap with the front side of the specific area (see FIG. 101(A)), see FIG. 101),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction display, which is a movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control and has a high influence on the game, is not obstructed more than the restoring display.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control that moves the movable body by a predetermined operation,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined effect movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined motion in the predetermined performance movable control (for example, in the initial motion, the support portion 32b overlaps with the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430). While the movement is performed in a manner that includes the movement of the moving object notice (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position), the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during variable display in the time saving state. The initial motion at the time is a portion performed in a motion mode that does not include the production motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body notice that overlaps with the right-handed hit promotion display 132SG430),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
A movable body,
a movable body control means;
Display means;
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
In the special state, the display means is capable of displaying a firing direction instruction display indicating a firing direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and is also capable of displaying information regarding the advantageous state in a predetermined display area;
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on;
The confirmation movable control is control for moving the movable body with respect to the specific display area so that the movable body does not overlap with the predetermined display area.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the firing direction instruction, which has a high influence on the game with a movable body operated by confirmation movement control, is not hindered more than information regarding an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is
Furthermore, it is equipped with a production control means,
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
When the movable body effect is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing a predetermined effect movement control that moves the movable body by a predetermined operation,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined effect movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movement control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movement control.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
When the movable body is powered on, the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, performs a performance control). The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-disk movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The game control means can perform specific identification information light emission control that indicates the result of variable display of specific identification information using a plurality of light emitting means (for example, when the variable display is stopped, the CPU 103 can The part where the lamps can be lit in combination according to the variable display results),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on;
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating a miss),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply has started to the game machine by the startup preparation display, and the specific identification light emission control that has a high impact on the game can be confirmed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be confirmed without any trouble.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are emitted in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the starting condition while the startup preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the display means displays the recovery in progress display ( For example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the part where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a game machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started in a state where the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which causes trouble in the confirmation work). be able to.

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if Pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are emitted in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display executed before the power outage is not completed while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the display means displays the recovery-in-progress display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the part where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed)
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, the special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 9) capable of storing reservation information regarding the variable display,
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if Pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are emitted in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, while the startup preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is finished, and the variable display is changed based on the pending information that was stored before the power outage. When the display is started, the display means displays a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the portion where the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a game machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started in a state where the display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which causes trouble in the confirmation work). be able to.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
Light emission control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control),
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
When the movable body is powered on, the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally (for example, performs a performance control). The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-disk movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The light emission control means is capable of performing initialization-compatible light emission control that causes a plurality of light emission means to emit light in a manner corresponding to initialization (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the frame LED 9a , 9b, a part that causes the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in the initialization notification mode),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)) when the power is turned on;
When the power is turned on with initialization (for example, when Pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the initialization compatible light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame on-movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are initialized. The part that emits light in the notification mode),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, the part where the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board face 32B, the frame on-board movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply has started to the gaming machine by the startup preparation display, and the initialization compatible light emission control can be confirmed without being distracted by the movable body being operated by the movable control. machine can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
Further comprising a light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED9d, below-disk movable body LED9e, frame on-movable body LED9f, chance button LED9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if Pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a recovery light emission control is performed in which the light emitting means emits light according to a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. A part that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and chance button LED 9g) to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that it is being restored),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a gaming machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started (which hinders the confirmation work) while the light emitting means is emitting light according to the light emission pattern corresponding to the variable display. can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
Further comprising a light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED9d, below-disk movable body LED9e, frame on-movable body LED9f, chance button LED9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if Pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a recovery light emission control is performed in which the light emitting means emits light according to a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. A part that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and chance button LED 9g) to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that it is being restored),
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power cut is completed while the startup preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the light emitting means by the light emitting control means is adjusted to the background display. Light emission control corresponding to the background display is performed to emit light according to the light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the under-disk movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, The part that causes the chance button LED9g to emit light in a manner according to the background image),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a gaming machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started (which hinders the confirmation work) while the light emitting means is emitting light according to the light emission pattern corresponding to the variable display. can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 22-4 is
Further comprising a light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED9d, below-disk movable body LED9e, frame on-movable body LED9f, chance button LED9g),
If a power outage occurs during one of a plurality of round games, and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after a power outage during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a recovery light emission control is performed in which the light emitting means emits light according to a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that restoration is in progress),
Thereafter, when the first round game that was being executed before the power cut is not completed while the startup preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues. (For example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), if the round game from before the power cut is not completed while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, The part where the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game machine prevents the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control from being started while the light emitting means is emitting light according to the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (which will hinder the confirmation work). can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 22-5 is
Further comprising a light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED9d, below-disk movable body LED9e, frame on-movable body LED9f, chance button LED9g),
If a power outage occurs during one of a plurality of round games, and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after a power outage during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a recovery light emission control is performed in which the light emitting means emits light according to a recovery pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that causes the upper movable body LED 9f and chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that restoration is in progress),
Thereafter, while the startup preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the first round game that was being executed before the power cut is finished, and the next round game after the first round game is started. When started, the light emission control during recovery continues to be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B), when the round game from before the power cut ends while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, Frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-panel movable body LED 9e, frame on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to being restored),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a gaming machine is provided in which the movement of the movable body by the confirmation movement control is not started (which hinders the confirmation work) while the light emitting means is emitting light according to the light emission pattern corresponding to the round game. can be provided.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on (for example, by performing a direction control). The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-disk movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The game control means is
If the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, the variable display result of the normal pattern is a hit (normal pattern hit). In this case, the part where opening control is executed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period),
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on when the normal variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to perform special control to bring the normal variable means into the easy-to-enter state again ( For example, if a power outage occurs while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol, the variable winning ball device The part that controls 6B to open state again),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on;
When the power is cut off when the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on (for example, after the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state) When the pachinko game machine 1 loses power and then starts up by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply has started to the game machine by the startup preparation display, and when the power is turned off when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (recovery from power outage). To provide a game machine in which a player can quickly confirm that a normal variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before power cutoff, without being distracted by a movable body operated by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is
When the power is cut off when the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on (for example, after the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state) When the pachinko game machine 1 loses power and then starts up by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the normal variable means which is in the easy-to-enter state due to the special control while the startup preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means A restoration-in-progress display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part where the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed after a game ball has won a prize in the open variable winning ball device 6B),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is
The result of the variable display becomes the predetermined display result. If a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal identification information, and then the power is turned on (for example, the variable display of the normal symbol has been executed before the power outage occurred, If the pachinko machine 1 starts with hot start s),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, control is performed to put the normal variable means into the easy-to-enter state (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the part that changes the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG01, chance button 631B),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103),
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on (for example, by performing a direction control). The control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 to perform the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-disk movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101) ,
The game control means is
In the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-to-enter state in which the game medium can easily enter (for example, the part that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to be in the open state),
When a power outage occurs when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, and the power is turned on thereafter, it is possible to perform special control to bring the variable means into the easy-to-enter state again ( For example, if a power outage occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the open state again based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by hot start. control part),
The display means is
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, the startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 102(D)),
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is turned on thereafter, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the portion where the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed) ),
When the power is cut off during the advantageous state and the variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on (for example, during a jackpot game and a round game) (When a power outage occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
After that, the restoration-in-progress display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply has started to the gaming machine by the startup preparation display, and when the variable means is in the easy-to-enter state, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on (recovery from power outage), the gaming machine is started. To provide a game machine in which a person can quickly confirm that a variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before power cutoff, and without being distracted by a movable body operated by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
It is possible to perform a plurality of round games in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8, a part where 3 to 10 round games can be executed as a jackpot game),
In a round game, it is possible to perform control to put the variable means in the easy-to-enter state and control to put the variable means in an inaccessible state (for example, as a round game, it is possible to put the special winning ball device 7 in the open state). (the part that controls the closed state and the part that controls the closed state),
When the power is cut off when the variable means is controlled to be in the easy-to-enter state, and then the power is turned on (for example, during a jackpot game, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated as a round game) When a power outage occurs while the pachinko machine 1 is in the open state and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
After that, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, when the special control in the first round game is completed and the variable means is controlled to be in the inaccessible state in the next round game while the startup preparation display is being displayed, the recovery display is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 108, when the round game ends and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the fence state while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed. (displayed part),
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the part where the initial movement of each movable body is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can execute a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display, so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
Movable bodies (for example, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Movable body control means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
The movable body control means may perform confirmation movement control (for example, operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on. It is possible and
The display means is
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, cold start processing), it is possible to display an initialization display (for example, initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating that initialization has been performed,
If the power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
After that, the confirmation movement control is performed,
Thereafter, after the confirmation movement control is finished, the display of the initialization display is finished (see FIGS. 109 and 110);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the gaming machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates due to the confirmation movable control, and it is also possible to confirm visually that the movable body that operates using the confirmation movable control It is possible to provide a game machine in which confirmation of whether or not initialization notification is completed is not hindered.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is
The period from when the power is turned on with initialization until the confirmation movement control is performed is longer than the period from when the power is turned on without initialization until the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, when initialization is not performed) The period from power-on with initialization (start-up during cold start processing) until operation confirmation control is performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (start-up during hot start processing) until operation confirmation control is performed. (the part with a longer period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not become impossible to visually recognize that the initialization display has been displayed due to the confirmation movement control being performed immediately when the power is turned on with initialization.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period, and is hidden after the predetermined execution period ends,
Even if the starting condition is met while the initialization display is displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds), and the initialization display is not hidden. (The part that is hidden after the predetermined execution period ends, and even if a starting prize occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display does not start) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 25-4 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display continues to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. (For example, if the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the occurrence of a starting winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the display of the initialization display will continue until the end of the execution period of the variable display. will be carried out continuously),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes possible to suitably perform operation confirmation control.

The gaming machine of form 25-5 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the fulfillment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display continues to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. (For example, after the power is turned on without initialization (startup in hot start processing), the background display is performed based on the game state background designation command without displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can perform a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
A first movable body (for example, chance button 631B),
A second movable body (for example, on-board movable body 32A),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
When the first movable body is located at the initial position and the second movable body is located at the initial position, the first movable body is located at the advanced position and the second movable body is located at the advanced position. The distance between the first movable body and the second movable body is shorter when the movable body is positioned (see FIG. 111),
The movable body control means includes:
Confirmation movement control that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally when the power is turned on. (for example, operation confirmation control),
The confirmation movable control moves the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position and moves the second movable body to the initial position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap. Then, the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap. (For example, in the operation confirmation control, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B are moved so that their initial operation periods overlap.) The body 32A starts moving from the origin position to the production position at the same time (see FIG. 111(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the production position so that the initial operation periods do not overlap. After stopping at the origin position (see FIG. 111(C)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the presentation position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 111(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can normally move to the advanced position and that the second movable body can normally operate to the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work. To provide a game machine in which the movement of a first movable body from the advanced position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from the advanced position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm, can be individually confirmed. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the first movable body and the second movable body,
The movable control means is configured to move the first movable body from an initial position to an advanced position so that movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap when the movable body performance is executed. and move the second movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and then move the first movable body from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movable periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap. It is possible to perform effect movement control in which the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position at the same time as the second movable body is moved to the initial position.
The confirmation movable control is a control that moves the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the operations of the first movable body and the second movable body in the production movable control (for example, Regarding the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, which perform a performance operation in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), in the operation confirmation control, FIGS. (a portion in which the initial action is performed in an operation mode that does not include the performance operation described in (for example, a mode in which the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are advanced separately),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is
Further comprising a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is placed in the advanced position,
The movement of the first movable body placed at the advanced position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is placed at the advanced position by the detection means ( For example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) placed at the production position in operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed by the second movable body (for example, on-board movable body 32B). (a part that is performed on the condition that it is detected by the position sensor 132SG134),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is
The movable body control means moves the movable body to an initial position when the movable body including the first movable body and the second movable body is not placed at the initial position when the power is turned on. It is possible to perform return control (for example, when the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are not located at the origin position before long initial motion control is started, the movable body A part where return control for moving the body to the initial position (for example, short initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101) is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can execute a variable display and derive a specific display result (for example, a jackpot) as a result of the variable display, so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. machine 1),
A first movable body (for example, under-panel movable body 32B),
A second movable body (for example, frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (for example, game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in the game frame (for example, the opening/closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means includes:
When the power is turned on, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body operate normally (confirmation movement control) For example, it is possible to perform
As the confirmation movement control, the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position, and while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable body operates normally. perform an operation to confirm that The part that moves from the origin position to the production position and then moves from the production position to the origin position (see Figures 57 (G) to (I)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during confirmation movable control, the first movable body disposed at the advanced position indicates that the confirmation movable control has not been completed, and when the first movable body is disposed at the advanced position, the first movable body is placed at the advanced position. It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which confirmation movement control of the second movable body is not overlooked by starting the operation of the second movable body.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is
Further comprising a detection means (for example, production position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position,
The movement of the first movable body placed at the advanced position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is placed at the initial position by the detection means ( For example, the movement of the first movable body (for example, the underboard movable body 32B) placed at the production position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed by the second movable body (for example, the underboard movable body 32B). The part that is performed on the condition that it is detected by the position sensor 132SG104),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform confirmation movement control.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of Fig. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear, back) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side are This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "132SGS1," "Normal reach" may be "N reach," "Super reach" may be "SP reach," etc. It is sometimes abbreviated as.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with an opening/closing door frame 3a having a glass window so as to be rotatable around the left side. The gaming area is visible through the glass window when closed.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type. The special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are constituted by a plurality of lamps (LEDs). When the variable display is stopped, the CPU 103 can turn on the plurality of lamps in a combination according to the variable display result.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B is, for example, equipped with an accessory having a movable piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in a retracted position where it is retracted from the game board surface. It becomes difficult for the game ball to flow down the upper surface of the piece, and the game ball enters the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening (it is also said that the second starting winning opening is in the closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece is in the protruding position where it protrudes forward from the game board surface, so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable piece. The game ball enters the second starting prize opening into an open state (it is also said that the second starting winning opening enters the open state). When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the above accessories.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided on the right side of the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the opening/closing door frame 3a. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b are provided at the top and left and right sides of the opening/closing door frame 3a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker LED 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), there are provided an above-board movable body 32A and a below-board movable body 32B that operate according to the performance. Furthermore, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are provided with movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the frame-top movable body 132SG121 is provided with a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g. It is being The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LED 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attacker LED 9c may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the opening/closing door frame 3a below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball launcher. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided. Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

Further, the lower center of the opening/closing door frame 3a is provided with a chance button 631B that can be pressed and operated by the player, and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled in the front and back directions by the player and is rotatably provided. An operation unit 600 is provided. Note that the chance button 631B is movable up and down between the origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and is also movable between the origin position and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the origin position. be. Furthermore, a cross key constituting a selection button 132SG35 for making settings related to effects such as volume is provided on the upper plate portion of the opening/closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 includes a button sensor 635B (see FIG. 2) for detecting the player's operation (movement) on the chance button 631B, and an origin sensor 635B for detecting that the chance button 631B is located at the origin position. A position sensor 635C (see FIG. 2), a protruding position sensor 635D (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the chance button 631B is in the protruding position, and a vibration motor 635E for vibrating the chance button 631B ( (see FIG. 2), a forward/backward motor 635F (see FIG. 2) for moving the chance button 631B forward and backward between the origin position and the protruding position, and a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A. A push/pull sensor 625Y (see FIG. 2) and a protruding position sensor 625C for detecting that the lever body 631A is located in the protruding position are provided. Further, the selection button 132SG35 is provided with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see FIG. 2) consisting of an upper sensor, a lower sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor for detecting operations of the cross key of the selection button 132SG35 in the up/down/left/right directions. ing.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The opening/closing door frame 3a has a first effect unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center position, a second effect unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left side, and a third effect unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right side. It has three production units. The first performance unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame movable body 132SG121 that is movable between the origin position and the performance position as described later.

A main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown) is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52 (see FIG. 2). As described later, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200 in the feature section 132SG, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set by operating the setting changeover switch 52. As the change state, the jackpot probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in the setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see FIG. 2) is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched.
The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the opening/closing door frame 3a.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward a game area by a player's rotational operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", it is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be executed repeatedly until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, etc.) are prepared, and jackpot types are set accordingly. . As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state continues until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time saving).

A normal state is a game state other than an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, or a special state such as a time saving state, and the probability that the display result in a general map game will be a "normal map hit" or a special state. The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the game will be a "jackpot", is in the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return process is executed after the power is turned on. The state is controlled in the same way as when the A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, in the first round of the jackpot (first win) in the normal state, the jackpot opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the production shown in FIG. 52 (F8) is performed. In the first round of the jackpot in the time saving state, the big winning opening is opened in a small winning opening pattern (opening and closing for a short period of time is repeated), so the effect shown in FIG. 40 (C2) is performed. In addition, in the second jackpot round during the time saving state, the jackpot opening will be opened in a jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the display, various lamps, and sound aspects will differ between the first and second rounds. It will be different.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024). ) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.By transmitting the detection signal, the game ball passes Or an intrusion has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the opening/closing door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The production control CPU 120 includes a push/pull sensor 625Y, a protrusion position sensor 625C, a button sensor 635B, an origin position sensor 635C, a protrusion position sensor 635D, an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, an origin position sensor 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and a production position sensor 132SG104. , 132SG114, 132SG124, and 132SG134 (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected and appropriately indicates the content of the operation) may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect. be.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 sends signals for operating the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to each movable body or the vibration motor 635E of each movable body, the advance/retreat motor 635F, It is supplied to a drive circuit that drives drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

In addition, control of audio output, lighting/extinguishing of lamps (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), control of on-board movable body 32A, under-panel movable body 32B, on-frame movable body 132SG121, and chance button 631B (each movable Supply of signals for moving the body, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 (see FIG. 12) after the special symbol process process is completed. 12.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority play). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 132SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 3 is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variable display time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(A), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win B."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stop (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

The command 9000H indicates that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold started (that the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 being depressed (that the recovery condition has not been met in step S3 of the game control main process in FIG. 12) This is a power-on designation command that designates that step S6 has been executed.

The command 9200H is executed in step S4 because the pachinko game machine has hot started (the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (the recovery condition has been met in step S3 of the game control main process in FIG. 12). This is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies that the

The command 95XXH is a gaming state background designation command that designates the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that the gaming state background designation command is also a command for specifying that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 be updated to a background image corresponding to the gaming state. In the gaming state background designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 4(B), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state background designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is a second gaming state background designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state A) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A. be. Command 9502H specifies the third gaming state background corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state C1) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B. It is a command. Command 9503H specifies the background of the fourth game state corresponding to the game state (high base state, time-save state B) in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C. It is a command. Command 9504H specifies the background of the fifth game state corresponding to the game state (high base state, time-save state B) in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a command. This is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state C2) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening which notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "10") in the jackpot game state or the small win game state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the pending memory display area 132SG005D etc. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the pending memory display area 132SG005D or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

Command D100H is a V winning notification designation command that notifies that a V winning has been won, that is, the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 and the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining time saving control number of times of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (awarded) when the game ball enters the winning hole. Command E100H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies execution of a customer waiting demonstration (demonstration performance).

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this feature section 132SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern. , a random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and a random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

FIG. 6 shows a variation pattern in the main characteristic portion 132SG. In this feature section 132SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit", when the variable display result is a "small win", etc. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

Among these fluctuation patterns, for the jackpot fluctuation pattern, after the same special symbol variable display time as the losing fluctuation pattern, the special symbol is uniformly displayed for 15 seconds to perform a blessing performance to celebrate that the variable display result is a jackpot. Additional display times are provided.

Here, regarding the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the loss fluctuation pattern in this feature section 132SG, the period until the variable display result is announced is configured in common, and the length of the period until the variable display result is announced. This prevents the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

In addition, the jackpot variation pattern in this feature section 132SG exemplifies a form in which a 15-second special symbol variable display time is additionally provided for executing a blessing performance after the same special symbol variable display time as the losing variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure variable display time for executing the blessing performance provided in the jackpot fluctuation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds, but may vary depending on the gaming state. Good too.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 6(A) and 6(B), in this characteristic part 132SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance according to the special symbol that performs variable display.

As shown in FIG. 6(A), as the variation patterns of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and the super reach variation pattern such as super reach α and super reach β. There is a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed, and a non-reach variation pattern in which no reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in this feature section 132SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, three or more super reach variation patterns may be provided.

In addition, among the normal reach variation pattern, super reach α variation pattern, and super reach β variation pattern in the first special symbol, a pseudo continuous performance in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and variable displayed again during variable display is performed 1 to 3 times. It also includes the variation patterns to be executed. In this feature section 132SG, which reach effect is executed, normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β, differs depending on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, if a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during a variable display, a normal reach effect will be executed after that, and if a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during a variable display, a super reach α reach effect will be executed after that. is executed, and if the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, then the reach effect of super reach β is executed.

In addition, among the reach effects that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the reach effect of super reach β is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and the reach effect of super reach α is higher than the reach effect of super reach β. Expectations for winning the jackpot are set low. The normal reach performance is set to have a lower jackpot expectation level than the super reach α reach performance (jackpot expectation level of the reach performance: super reach β>super reach α>normal reach). In other words, in this feature section 132SG, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during a variable display, the higher the expectation of a jackpot in the variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the main feature section 132SG includes a jackpot variation pattern, a small hit variation pattern, a loss variation pattern, and a variation pattern of the first special symbol. A non-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern (a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach γ movement pattern in which a super reach γ reach effect is executed) having different special figure variable display times are provided. ing. Among the fluctuation patterns of these second special symbols, the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation (the second special symbol Jackpot expectation level: Super reach γ > normal reach > non-reach).

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 7 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. Variation pattern determination tables (see FIGS. 14 to 19) that store a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 7(A), display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 7(B), and jackpot type determination table (first In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 7(D), the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 7(E), there are various variable pattern determination tables for the first special symbol (for special symbols), 14 and 19), various second special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see FIGS. 20 to 19), and regular symbol variation pattern determination tables (not shown).

FIGS. 7A and 7B are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination table 1 and display result determination table 2. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table 1, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (the value set by the CPU 103 when executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying the special symbol to perform variable display) is 1 (first), that is, , for the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for determining a jackpot and a determination value for determining a small win are set. In the display result determination table 2, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (the value set by the CPU 103 when executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying the special symbol to perform variable display) is 2 (second), that is. , for the case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for determining a jackpot and a determination value for determining a small win are set.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, a jackpot can be won, and a small win will not occur. The probability of winning the jackpot when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first is about 1/200.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, a determination value corresponding to a jackpot and a determination value corresponding to a small win are set. Incidentally, when the variable display special symbol designating buffer is the second one, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/200, and the probability of winning the small win is about 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first (when the special symbol that performs variable display is the first special symbol), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIG. 7(A). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B). In addition, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second one (when the special symbol that performs variable display is the second special symbol), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIG. 7(B). If it matches the hit judgment value, it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot B), and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit judgment values corresponding to the small hit shown in FIG. 7(B). , it is decided to make the variable display result a small win.

Note that the "probability" shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B) indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not. Also, deciding whether to make a small win means deciding whether to control the small win game state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B a small win symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

In this feature section 132SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B) to determine whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win. However, a jackpot determination table and a small hit determination table are provided separately, and the determination of the jackpot is determined by the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used for the display, and a separate table may be used to determine the small hit depending on the variable display special figure designation buffer.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, no judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it was designed to prevent winning, a portion of the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the jackpot may be set as the determination value corresponding to the small win, so that the small win may be won.

FIGS. 7(C) and 7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 7(C) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is the table. In addition, FIG. 7(D) shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). It's a table.

The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type to jackpot A or jackpot B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is the table being referenced. In addition, in this feature section 132SG, as shown in FIGS. 7(C) and (D), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, only one type of jackpot, jackpot B, is provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, the jackpot that occurs when a variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when a variable display of the second special symbol is performed. The only jackpot that occurs is jackpot B.

FIG. 7(E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table changes the type of small hit to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, if the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during a small winning game of small winning A, that is, if a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type C is executed. If the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during a small winning game with small winning B, that is, when a V winning jackpot occurs, the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E. When the game is started and the game ball passes the second count switch 132SG024 during the small winning game of small winning B, that is, when a V winning jackpot occurs, the jackpot type is a jackpot E. The game is now running. In other words, these jackpot C to jackpot E are not the jackpot type determined by the random number MR2 for determining the winning type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball is played during the small winning game of either small winning A or small winning B. This is the jackpot type determined by passing through the second count switch 132SG024.

Here, the jackpot types in the feature section 132SG will be explained using FIG. 8. In the feature section 132SG, jackpot A to jackpot E are set as the jackpot types in which time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. has been done.

Among these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in three rounds (so-called 3 rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, the interval period of each round in jackpot A is all set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol game is played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The time saving control is executed in the time saving state A until it is executed.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, the interval period of each round in jackpot B is all set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state ends, the variable display of the second special symbol will be used until the special symbol game is executed up to 685 times, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol will continue. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state C1 until the special figure game is executed a maximum of 689 times in total.

Jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in three rounds (so-called 3 rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, regarding the interval period of each round in jackpot C, the interval period of the first round and the second round is set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the third round is set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state ends, the variable display of the second special symbol will be used until the special symbol game is executed up to seven times, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol will continue. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state B until a total of 11 special symbol games are executed at maximum.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, regarding the interval period of each round in Jackpot D, the interval period of the 1st round, the 2nd round, and the 4th round to the 9th round is set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the 3rd round is set to 30 seconds. It is set to seconds. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot D, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will continue until the special symbol game is executed up to seven times with the variable display of the second special symbol as the target. The time saving control is executed in the time saving state B until the special figure game is executed a maximum of 11 times in total for the variable display.

The jackpot E is a jackpot in which nine rounds (so-called nine rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. In addition, regarding the interval period of each round in Jackpot E, the interval period of the 1st round, the 2nd round, and the 4th round to the 9th round is set to 0.5 seconds, and the interval period of the 3rd round is set to 30 seconds. It is set to seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state of jackpot E ends, until the special pattern game is executed up to 685 times with the variable display of the second special symbol, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The time saving control is executed in the time saving state C2 until the special figure game is executed a maximum of 689 times in total for the variable display.

In this way, the interval period of the third round of jackpot C to jackpot E is set to 30 seconds, and this feature section 132SG suggests that the jackpot game will continue for the 30 seconds until the ninth round. As a performance, it is possible to perform a promotion performance that will be described later.

In addition, in each time-saving state, the probability of "hitting a regular symbol" increases, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, that is, the second starting winning becomes easier. This makes it easier to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, making it easier for small hits to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times in the time saving state and immediately after the end of the time saving state, there are cases where a jackpot occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and cases where the game ball hits a small hit during the game. Since a jackpot may occur by winning a V prize in a game, a so-called consecutive game state occurs in which a jackpot game state tends to occur continuously.

In addition, in the time-saving state A after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control for the second special symbol is executed is set to one, so the second special The variable display result is a jackpot or small hit by either variable display of the symbol or variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol at one time. The ratio (the sum of the ratio at which a jackpot or small hit occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol five times in total and the ratio at which a jackpot occurs when the game ball wins a V prize) is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the second special symbol The variable display result will be a jackpot or a small hit with either the variable display of the 2nd special symbol or the variable display of the 2nd special symbol based on up to 4 reserved memories that occur during the 7 variable displays of the 2nd special symbol. The percentage (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small wins occurring during the variable display of the second special symbol 11 times in total and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V) is set to about 83%.

In addition, in the time-saving state C2 after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B or jackpot E, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control for the second special symbol is executed is set to 685, so the number of special symbol games is set to 685. The variable display result is a jackpot or The percentage of small hits (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small hits occurring during the variable display of the second special symbol 685 times in total and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V) is set to almost 100%. ing.

In addition, although four types of jackpot A to jackpot E are provided as jackpot types in this feature section 132SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types may be provided. Moreover, three or less types may be provided.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 132SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a special figure reservation storage section 132SG151, a regular figure reservation storage section 132SG151C, a game control flag setting section 132SG152, a game control timer setting section 132SG153, and a game control counter setting section. 132SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 132SG155.

The special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151 stores a special figure game that has not yet been started although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. (Special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) and the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and winning the starting prize. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 4B) which has occurred but has not yet been started (second starting winning) is stored in order of winning.

As an example, the special figure reservation storage unit 132SG151 associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole with the holding number, and calculates the starting opening buffer value, the passing of the game ball. Random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for hit type determination, random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment of the first starting condition in (approach) Numerical data indicating , etc. are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "8"). Note that the number of pending data stored in response to winnings in the first starting winning hole and the number of pending data stored in response to winnings in the second starting winning hole are each at maximum four.

The pending data stored in the special figure pending storage unit 132SG151 indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure or the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and these special figure This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in the game.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a separate reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. Furthermore, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening in this way, and the game ball passing through the second starting prize opening ( In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize due to the entry (entering) is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage unit, variable information based on the first reservation information is stored in association with the reservation number. One of the display and the variable display based on the second pending storage information may be performed with priority over the variable display based on the other pending information.

The normal figure reservation storage section 132SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 132SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 132SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 132SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 132SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 132SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 132SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 132SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The special pattern variable display performance control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns, and corresponds to the period from when the special pattern starts changing in the special pattern game until the finalized special pattern that becomes the special pattern display result is derived and displayed. From data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach performance, re-lottery performance, etc., or various performance display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The preview performance control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of a performance operation that is a preview performance that is executed in response to a plurality of preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.

The special figure variable display performance control pattern may include a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different, for example, for each variable pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 includes a performance control data holding area 132SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The production control data holding area 132SG190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes a production control flag setting section 132SG191, a production control timer setting section 132SG192, a production control counter setting section 132SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 132SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting section 132SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 132SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 132SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 132SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 132SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 132SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 132SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 132SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 132SG194A as shown in FIG. 10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 132SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers ``1'' to ``1'') corresponding to the maximum value (for example, ``8'') of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory. 8), and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to buffer number 0). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command and the number of pending memories. Three commands called notification commands (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) are sent as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In the storage area of the starting winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, these starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are associated, and the first special figure pending storage and the second special symbol are stored in the storage area. A storage area (entry) is reserved for collectively storing the figure pending storage.

The memory contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as described later when the start condition is met and variable display of the highest pending memory (buffer number "1") begins. As time progresses, the memory contents of the buffer number "0" that stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied will be cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop process that is executed when the variable display ends. ing.

Furthermore, the starting winning reception command buffer 132SG194A of the feature section 132SG has a memory for setting a pending display flag value indicating the display mode of pending display or active display in the prefetch notice setting process (FIG. 35) to be described later. area, and a storage area for setting a panel display flag value indicating a pattern (panel pattern) of a variable display compatible panel and a second special figure hold memory compatible panel to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state A; is reserved for each buffer number.

At the time of starting winning, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning of the free entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the starting winning receiving command buffer 132SG194A. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when a command is received, the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer number corresponding to the pending storage in this order. This will continue to be the case.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 132SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " At the same time, the items stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display (the entry corresponding to the buffer number ``1'') and the starting variable are deleted. The stored contents of the entries subsequent to the display pending storage are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols ends in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, and each command stored in buffer number "1" is deleted. The command is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands are shifted to buffer number "3", Each command stored in the area corresponding to "4", "5", etc. is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "2", "3", "4", etc. . Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are received, and these If commands have been received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A as a reserved memory of each special symbol.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), a recovery process (step S4) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stop. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the settings are being confirmed or that the settings are being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

After executing the recovery process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the production control command to be transmitted in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process processing in the feature section 132SG. In the special symbol process process in this feature section 132SG, the special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win", and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". , the type of small win in the case of "small win" is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, this feature section 132SG stores the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, and establishes the start condition of the special drawing game in the winning order (also called winning order ending). say).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, multiple fluctuation patterns are created using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the predetermined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". It includes processing to determine one of the types. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variable display time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbols. It specifies the contents of the content (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening processing includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a jackpot based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small winning opening preprocessing in step 132SGS118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, etc. This process includes a process of determining whether it is time to return the grand prize opening from an open state to a closed state, a process of determining whether a game ball has been detected by the second count switch 132SG024, and the like. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step 132SGS120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, if the game ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small winning game state ends, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" and the small winning process ends. Furthermore, if no game ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small winning game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering into the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (132SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (132SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 132SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 132SGS102 (132SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 132SGS101 (132SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit at 132SGS102 (132SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the player, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (132SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), the number of reserved second special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (132SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 132SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 132SGS105 (132SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 132SGS103 and 132SGS106, the special figure pending storage number corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 132SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. 132SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type/small win type when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 132SGS 109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (132SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (132SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (132SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 132SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 132SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N at 132SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 132SGS 112 in FIG. 14 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 132SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 13) is performed to determine the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as a "jackpot" and win the jackpot. A determination is made as to whether or not to control to a gaming state or to control to a small winning gaming state as a "small winning". In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 13), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, in other words, at the start of the variable display, it is possible to determine whether or not to make a jackpot or to make a small win. Before it is determined whether or not to win, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or "small hit", and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc., as described later, Advance notices such as panel display effects and pending notice effects are now executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first specifies whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (step 132SGS121). Then, it is determined whether the set starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS122a). If the starting port buffer value is 1, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 7(A) is selected and the process proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b); The display result determination table 2 shown in B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result determination table, and determines whether the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, it is determined whether the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step 132SGS123b).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random value MR1 is outside the small hit determination value range, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command according to the loss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, if the gaming state is the normal state, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18(A) is selected; For example, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19(A) is selected, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

In addition, if the starting opening buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is time saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20(A), the gaming state is time saving state B, time saving state C1 Or, if the variable display is from the 1st to the 7th time in the time-saving state C2, the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. selects the second special symbol variation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 18(A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

Further, in step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination value range, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the small hit (step 132SGS127). Then, when the gaming state is time saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. If it is a variable display, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 21(C) is used, and if the gaming state is a variable display after the 8th time in the normal state or time saving state C2, the table is shown in FIG. 18(C). The second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG.

Further, in step 132SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. , selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19(B), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

In addition, if the starting opening buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the normal state, if the gaming state is the time saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 20(B), the game If the state is the 1st to 7th variable display of time saving state B, time saving state C1 or time saving state C2, the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 21(B), the gaming state is normal state or time saving state If it is the eighth or subsequent variable display in state C2, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG. 22(B) and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS130c).

In step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random value MR3 extracted in step 132SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and other (normal reach). Then, transmission settings are made for a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in FIG. 15B) according to the determination result, and the winning random value determination process is ended (step 132 SGS132).

In addition, the commands set to be transmitted in step 132SGS124, step 132SGS126a, step 132SGS127, step 132SGS129, and step 132SGS132 are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing (step S110) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is a pending memory in the special symbol pending storage section 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). If there is no pending memory in the special symbol pending storage section 132SGS151, demonstration display settings such as transmission settings for customer waiting demonstration designation commands are performed and the special symbol normal processing is ended (step 132SGS572). Note that the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 12).

In addition, when there is a reservation memory in the special figure reservation storage section 132SGS151, the start opening buffer value and the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are read out and specified from the reservation number "1" of the special figure reservation storage section 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). In addition, the value of the special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number of the variable display target is decreased by 1, and the storage contents of the special figure pending storage section 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

Further, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value specified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special figure designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 132SGS544b), and when the starting opening buffer value is 2, when the starting opening buffer value is 2, The variable display special figure designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Next, a display result determination table is set according to the variable display special figure designation buffer value (step 132SGS555). Then, the random number MR1 read out in step 132SGS542 is compared with the display result determination table set in step 132SGS555, and it is determined whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 132SGS556). If the value of the random number MR1 is outside the range of the jackpot, it is further determined whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of the small win (step 132SGS557). If the value of the random number MR1 is within the small win range, that is, if the variable display result is a small win, a small win flag is set (step 132SGS558). Then, the small hit type determination table (see FIG. 7(E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small hit type is determined by comparing the selected small hit type determination table with the random value MR2 read out in step 132SGS542. Determine (step 132SGS558b). Then, a small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). Incidentally, if the value of the random number MR1 is outside the small hit range, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the process proceeds to step 132SGS570.

Further, if the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range in step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 7(C) or FIG. 7(D)) corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the selected jackpot type determination table and step 132SGS542 are read out. The jackpot type is determined by comparing it with the random number MR1 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value is set according to the determined jackpot type, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

In step 132SGS570, the CPU 103 determines a confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process, and the special symbol normal process is ended (step 132SGS571).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. 13. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure (step 132SGS131). Whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure may be determined by, for example, whether the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1 or not. If the first special figure is a variable display, select a variable pattern determination table from the variable pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 according to the variable display result, gaming state, and number of pending memories, and proceed to step 132SGS135 ( Step 132SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is off, the gaming state is normal, and the number of stored first special symbols is 2 or less, select the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 18(A), If the variable display result is off, the gaming state is normal, and the number of stored first special symbols is 3 or more, select the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 18(B) and display the variable display. If the result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the normal state, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 18(C) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display result is wrong and the gaming state is one of the time saving states, select the first special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 19(A), and the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is In either of the time saving states, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 19(B) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display result, the gaming state, the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter (the number of variable displays in each time-saving state), etc. A variation pattern determination table is selected from FIGS. 20 to 23 and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is wrong and the gaming state is time-saving state A, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 20(A), the variable display result is a jackpot, and the gaming state is time-saving state A. If so, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 20(B), and if the variable display result is a small hit and the gaming state is time saving state A, select the second special pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 20(C). Select graphical variation pattern determination table C.

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display of time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2, the second variable display shown in FIG. 21(A) Select the special pattern variation pattern determination table D, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display of time saving state B, time saving state C1, time saving state C2. For example, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. For the display and the 12th to 685th variable display, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 21(A).

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state C2 and the variable display is the 8th to 10th time, the variable display result in the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 22(A) is If the variable display is the 8th to 10th time in the jackpot and the gaming state is normal state or time saving state C2, the variable display result is the small hit and the gaming state is If it is the 8th to 10th variable display in the normal state or time saving state C2, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 22(A) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state C2, the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is If it is the 11th variable display in the time saving state C2, the variable display result is a small hit, the variable display result is a small hit, and the gaming state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state C2. If so, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 23(C).

After executing Step 132SGS132 or Step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern by comparing the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 read in Step 132SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing (Step 132SGS135). In addition, in the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 specifies the variation pattern including the random value MR3 read out in step 132SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing from among the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, and The identified variation pattern may be determined as the variation pattern for performing variable display.

Then, settings are made to start variable display of the special symbol (step 132SGS136), and settings are made to send various commands for starting variable display, such as a fluctuation pattern designation command and a variable display result designation command according to the determined fluctuation pattern ( Step 132SGS137), a variable display time timer is set according to the fluctuation pattern (Step 132SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process, and the variation pattern setting process is ended (step 132SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 132SGS137 are transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG.

In addition, regarding the out-of-reach variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the random number MR3 allocation is set as shown in Figures 18 and 19, so the non-reach variation pattern is the most determined. The fluctuation patterns of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β become more difficult to determine in this order. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, the random number MR3 allocation is set as shown in Figures 22 and 23, so the fluctuation pattern of super reach β is the most It is easy to determine, and it becomes difficult to determine in the order of super reach α and normal reach variation patterns. Therefore, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed with a non-reach variation pattern, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is lowest, and the normal reach, It is set so that the percentage of variable display results that become jackpots increases in the order of the variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. In other words, the shorter the special figure variation time is, the lower the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot, and the longer the special figure variation time is set, the higher the rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot.

Further, among the plurality of variation patterns, among the variation patterns that execute a common reach effect, the variation pattern that executes a pseudo-continuous effect is set so that the jackpot expectation level is higher. For example, regarding the variation pattern that executes the reach effect of Super Reach β, there are a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect and a variable pattern that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect, but a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect, and a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. The expectation level of jackpot is set higher for the variation pattern of , than for the variation pattern of super reach β that does not perform pseudo-continuous performance. Similarly, regarding the variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach α, there are two types of variation patterns that execute a pseudo continuous effect and a variable pattern that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect. The α fluctuation pattern is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the super reach α fluctuation pattern that does not perform pseudo-continuous performance. Furthermore, regarding the variation pattern that executes the normal reach reach effect, there are two types of variation patterns that execute a pseudo continuous effect and a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect, but the normal reach variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. The expected jackpot is set higher than the normal reach variation pattern that does not perform pseudo-continuous performance.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. 13. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a symbol determination period timer, which will be described later, is in operation (step 132SGS201). If the symbol confirmation period is not in operation, the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (step 132SGS202), and the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation command is performed ( Step 132SGS203). Note that the symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, if any time-saving flag is set, clear the time-saving flag and other game status flags (step 132SGS205), and clear the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter. (Step 132SGS206). Furthermore, the transmission setting of the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command according to the jackpot type and the transmission setting of the gaming state background designation command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state are performed, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS242 (step 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). The winning start designation command and the game state background designation command are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

Furthermore, if the symbol determination period timer is operating in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 132SGS209), and determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer has timed out ( Step 132SGS210). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and if the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out, it is further determined whether the derived and displayed stopped symbol is a missed symbol or not. (Step 132SGS211). If the derived and displayed stop symbol is a missed symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, the special symbol stop process is ended (step 132SGS212), and the derived and displayed symbol is If the stopped symbol is not a winning symbol, it is determined whether the derived and displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 132SGS213). If the derived and displayed stop symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing, the special symbol stop process is completed (step 132SGS214), and the derived and displayed symbol is If the stopped symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing, and the special symbol stopping process is ended (step 132SGS215).

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time saving number counter is 1 or more (step 132SGS216). In addition, the total time saving number counter, in the time saving state, is the sum of the maximum time saving control number of the first special symbol and the maximum time saving control number of the second special symbol (one of "5", "11", and "689"). ) is the counter to be set.

If the value of the total time saving number counter is 1 or more, the value of the total time saving number counter is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether the finished variable display is the variable display of the first special figure (step 132SGS218). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, the process advances to step 132SGS224, and if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2 (if the finished variable display is the variable display of the second special figure), the process proceeds to step 132SGS224. The value of the 2 special figure time saving number counter is decremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). The second special symbol time saving number counter is a counter to which the maximum time saving control number (any one of "1", "7", and "685") of the second special symbol is set in the time saving state.

In step 132SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any time saving flag is set (whether or not the time saving state is being controlled). If none of the time saving flags is set, the process advances to step 132SGS240, and if any of the time saving flags is set, it is further determined whether the value of the total time saving number counter has become 0 or not, that is, if the controlled It is determined whether the variable display of the maximum number of times of time saving control has ended in the current time saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time saving number counter is not 0, the process advances to step 132SGS240, and if the value of the total time saving number counter is 0, the set time saving flag is cleared (step 132SGS226), and the value of the total time saving number counter is cleared. is cleared and the process proceeds to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small win flag is set, transmission settings are made for a win start 3 designation command or a win 4 start designation command depending on the small win type, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS242. In addition, the winning start 3 designation command and the winning 4 start designation command are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. Incidentally, if the small hit flag is not set, the process advances to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period in the symbol confirmation period timer (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of this feature section 132SG), and determines the pattern according to the set value. Configure the transmission settings for period specification commands. Furthermore, the transmission setting of the gaming state background designation command according to the gaming state is performed, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 132SGS243).

The symbol confirmation period designation command and the gaming state background designation command are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 13 as the small winning opening process. In the small winning opening processing, the CPU 103 first increments the value of the opening time timer by 1 (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the open time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening time timer has timed out, the process moves to 132SGS293, and if the opening time timer has not timed out, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the big prize opening (132SGS283). If it is the timing to open the big winning hole, the CPU 103 controls the big winning hole to open by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the transmission setting of the big prize opening designation command corresponding to the round is performed (132SGS285), and the process moves to 132SGS286. Incidentally, the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open, which has been set to be transmitted in 132SGS285, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the timing to open the big prize opening, the process moves to 132SGS286 without passing through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

At 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening (132SGS286). If it is the closing timing of the big winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the big winning opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS287). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after opening the big winning hole according to the round is performed (132SGS288), and the process moves to 132SGS289. In addition, the large winning a prize opening designation command, which is set to be transmitted in 132SGS288, is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the big prize opening, the process moves to 132SGS289 without going through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

At 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on (132SGS289). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not turned on, the small winning opening process is finished, and if the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on, it means that the second count switch 132SG024 is already turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 is set (132SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win opening process is ended, and if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (132SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting the V winning prize notification command to the production control board 12 (132SGS292). Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10", which is the value corresponding to the small hit ending process (S120) (132SGS293), and ends the small hit opening process.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 132SGS 120 in FIG. 13 as the small hit ending process. In the small winning ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether the small winning end display timer is operating or not. (132SGS301). If the small hit end display timer is not operating (132SGS301; N), clear the small hit flag (132SGS302), and set to send a win end designation command according to the small win to the production control board 12 (132SGS303) ). The winning end designation command is sent to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small winning end display time is set in the small winning end display timer (132SGS304), and the small winning ending process is ended.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is in operation, the value of the small win end display timer is decreased by 1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small winning end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small winning ending display timer has timed out (132SGS306). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not turned on, the small winning end process is finished, and if the second count switch 132SG024 is turned on, it means that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, i.e. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 is set (132SGS308). If the V winning flag is set, the small win ending process is ended, and if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the production control board 12 (132SGS310), and ends the small winning ending process. Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Further, when the small winning end display time has elapsed in 132SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (132SGS311). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type from "Jackpot C" to "Jackpot E" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (132SGS314). As for the jackpot type, as shown in Figure 7 (E), if the small hit type in which the V winning occurred is "Small hit A", the jackpot type is determined to be "Jackpot C", and the said V winning If the small win type that occurred is “Small win B”, the jackpot type is determined as “Jackpot D”, and if the small win type that caused the V winning is “Small win C”, the jackpot type is determined as “Small win C”. is decided as “Jackpot E”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 132SG155 (132SGS315), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember.

In addition, the time saving flag and the time saving state variable display count counter are cleared (step 132SGS316, step 132SGS317), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) ( 132SGS318), the small hit ending process is ended.

In other words, in this feature section 132SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during the small winning game but also during the period after the small winning game ends until the small winning end display time elapses. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big prize opening just before the end of the small hit game, the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 and the jackpot game is executed after the small win end process is completed. It looks like this.

In addition, if the V winning flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (132SGS319), which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110), and the small hit is Finish the termination process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 13. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not in operation, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 132SGS322a), and a jackpot end designation command transmission setting is performed according to the jackpot type (step 132SGS322b). Incidentally, the jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. Also, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer, and the jackpot end processing is ended (step 132SGS322c). .

In addition, if the jackpot end display timer is operating in step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is -1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). ). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end processing is ended, and if the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 132SGS325) . When the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special symbol time saving number counter is set to "1", and the total time saving number counter is set to "5" (step 132SGS326, step 132SGS327). Then, the time saving A flag indicating that the time saving state A is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

Further, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot E, set the second special figure time saving number counter to "685" and set the total time saving number counter to "689" (Step 132SGS329, Step 132SGS330) . Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot B (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time saving C1 flag indicating that the control is in the time saving state C1 is set and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a), and if the jackpot type is jackpot E, the time saving state C2 is set. A time saving C2 flag indicating that the control is being performed is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

In addition, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is jackpot D, and the second special figure time saving number counter is set to "7", and the total time saving number counter is set to "11". ” (Step 132SGS335, Step 132SGS336). Then, a time saving B flag indicating that the time saving state B is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

In step 132SGS339b, the CPU 103 performs transmission settings for a gaming state background designation command according to the executed jackpot type (step 132SGS339b). Note that the game state background designation command is sent to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. Furthermore, the gaming state background designation command for which transmission settings have been made is stored (step 132SGS340), and the jackpot ending process is ended.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 28 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a startup preparation display process (step 132SGS70) for displaying a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, and a predetermined initialization process. Then (step S71), the RAM 122 is cleared, various initial values are set, and register settings for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the production control board 12 are performed. In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the original position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Note that in this embodiment, "display" and "image" are sometimes used, for example, "startup preparation display" described in the embodiment is described as "startup preparation image" in the drawings; Since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" is sometimes written as "image" and "image" is sometimes written as "display."

Furthermore, the initialization process in step S71 prevents the startup preparation display displayed in the startup preparation display display process in step 132SGS70 from being initialized. Further, by displaying the start-up preparation display, it is possible to quickly know that power has been supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to confirm that the image display device 5 can display the display normally. .

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command captured at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power outage recovery display process (step 132SGS75b) for displaying a power outage recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the power outage recovery designation command from the CPU 103; An initial operation control process (step 132SGS75c) for executing the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up is executed.

The startup preparation display process in the feature section 132SG includes a process of setting a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start at the timing when it is determined that the power-on designation command has been received. The power outage recovery display processing in the feature section 132SG includes a process of setting a hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started with a hot start at the timing when it is determined that a power outage recovery designation command has been received. Contains.

Moreover, after the initial operation control process, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value updating process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a process of updating the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and each Based on the volume/light intensity adjustment process (step 132SGS79) for adjusting the light intensity of the LED and the reception of the background image designation command from the CPU 103, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed to the received background image. A background image update process (step 132SGS80) is executed to update the background image to a background image according to the image designation command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration performance may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 29, the initial operation control process can be roughly divided into movable bodies provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (on-board movable body 32A, under-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and on-frame movable body 132SG101). In order to check the origin placement control process (step 132SGS100) for arranging the objects at their respective origin positions, and the operation of these movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A, under-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and frame-top movable body 132SG101). This includes two processes: an operation confirmation control process (step 132 SGS200).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in the origin placement control process in FIG. 29. In the origin placement control process shown in FIG. 30, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132SGS401). If the origin point operation period timer is not in operation, it is further determined whether or not the origin point placement control completed flag at startup is set (step 132SGS402). If the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the demonstration performance (step 132SGS403). Whether or not it is the start timing of the demo performance can be determined by, for example, whether or not the process timer for the demo performance is in operation, or whether the value of the process timer for the demo performance is a value that corresponds to the start timing of the demo performance. You can determine whether it exists or not.

If it is not the start timing of the demonstration performance, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display can be determined, for example, by whether or not the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is operating, or whether the value of the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is the start timing of the variable display. It is only necessary to determine whether the value corresponds to the timing. If it is not the start timing of variable display, the origin placement control process ends.

Then, if the start-up origin placement controlled flag is not set in step 132SGS402, if it is not the start timing of the demonstration effect in step 132SGS403, and if it is not the start timing of the variable display in step 132SGS404, the effect control CPU 120 controls Identify the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the target movable body (step 132SGS410), and determine whether there is any movable body whose origin position sensor is not detected. (Step 132SGS411). If there is a movable body whose origin position sensor is not detected, identify the movable body whose origin position sensor is not detected (non-detected movable body) (step 132SG412), and identify the movable body whose origin position sensor is not detected (step 132SG412). Movement control of the non-detection movable body toward the origin is started by means such as driving a corresponding motor (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. Note that if there is no movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor in step 132SGS411, that is, if all the movable bodies are arranged at each origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS414 without executing step 132SGS412 and step 132SGS413. .

In step 132SGS414, the production control CPU 120 specifies the detection movable body (the movable body disposed at the origin position). Then, the detection operation process data of the detection movable body is set (step 132SGS415), and the timer count of the detection operation process timer is started to control the operation of the movable body (detection movable body) and the display of the image display device 5. Then, the sound output control of the speakers 8L, 8Rk, etc. and the light emission control of each LED are started (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, the timer count of the origin operation period timer is started, and the origin placement control process is ended (step 132SGS417).

Further, when the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the production control CPU 120 subtracts -1 from the values of both the detection operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). Then, it is determined whether or not the origin operation period timer after the subtraction has timed up (timed out) (step 132SGS421). If the origin operation period timer after the subtraction is not up, the operation is controlled based on the process data corresponding to the detection operation process timer value after the subtraction, and the origin placement control process is ended (step 132SGS422).

Further, if the origin operation period timer is up in step 132SGS421, the operation of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423), and the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103) of each movable body to be controlled is , 635C) is identified (step 132SGS424). Then, it is determined whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS425).

If there is a movable body whose origin position sensor is not detected, identify the movable body whose origin position sensor is not detected (non-detected movable body) (step 132SG426), and control the origin position at startup. If the flag is not set, the flag is set and the origin placement control process ends (step 132SGS427). Note that if there is no movable body whose origin position sensor is not detecting, the process of step 132SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process is ended.

31 and 32 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the process executed in the operation confirmation control process in FIG. 29. As mentioned above, a cold start in this feature section 132SG means that the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 while the clear switch 92 is pressed down, that is, the game control is started when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. This refers to the execution of the initialization process (step S6) in the main process, and the hot start in this feature section 132SG refers to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on without the clear switch 92 being pressed; In other words, it indicates that the recovery process (step S4) was executed in the game control main process when the pachinko game machine 1 was started.

In the operation confirmation control process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set (step 132SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation execution flag is not set, it is determined whether the operation confirmation execution execution flag is set (step 132SGS502). If the operation check execution flag is not set, it is determined whether the operation check completed flag is set (step 132SGS503).

If the operation confirmed flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated, and if the operation confirmed flag is not set, it is further determined whether the start-up origin position control completed flag is set ( Step 132SGS504). If the start-up origin placement controlled flag is not set, the operation check control process is terminated, and if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is set, the operation check execution flag is set (step 132SGS505); It is determined whether there is a memory of an undetected movable body (step 132SGS506). If there is no memory of an undetected movable body, the process advances to step 132SGS508, and if there is a memory of an undetected movable body, the operation of the undetected movable body is restricted, and then the process advances to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

In step 132SGS508, the production control CPU 120 specifies the startup type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a cold start or a hot start), and sets process data for operation confirmation (upper) according to the startup type. . In addition, in step 132 SGS508, it is specified whether the cold start flag or the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, the startup type is specified as cold start and the process responds to the cold start. Set the process data for operation check (upper), and if the hot start flag is set, specify the startup type as hot start and set the process data for operation check (upper) according to the hot start. good.

Then, the timer count of the process timer (upper level) for operation confirmation is started to control the operation of the movable body, display control of the image display device 5, sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R, and light emission control of each LED. The operation confirmation control process ends (step 132SGS509).

If the operation check execution flag is set in step 132SGS502, the production control CPU 120 subtracts -1 from the value of the process timer (upper) for operation check (step 132SGS510), and Process data corresponding to the value of the process timer is specified (step 132SGS511). Then, it is determined whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS512). If the specified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the specified process data is data corresponding to the performance position (step 132SGS513). If the specified process data is not the corresponding data of the performance position, the process advances to step 132SGS515, and if the specified process data is the data corresponding to the performance position, the performance result of the performance position sensor of the corresponding movable body is stored, and then step The process advances to 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

In step 132SGS515, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process switching flag is set. If the process switching flag is set, the operation confirmation control processing is finished, and if the process switching flag is not set, determine whether it is the start timing of the target variable display where the movable body effect is executed. (Step 132SGS516). If it is not the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body effect is executed, the movement of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed based on the process data specified in step 132SGS511. , controls the light emission of each LED, and ends the operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS517).

In addition, if it is the start timing of the target variable display where the movable object effect is executed, the startup type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a cold start or a hot start) is specified, and the specified startup type is set. Accordingly, the lower switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in FIG. 33 is specified (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the specified startup type is cold start, image display control and LED light emission control in the image display device 5 are specified as lower switching control types, and the specified startup type is If it is a hot start, image display control on the image display device 5 and sound output control from the speakers 8L and 8R are specified as lower-order switching control types.

Then, the production control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower-order switching control type to the lower-order process data among the process data specified in step 132SGS518 (step 132SGS219), and sets the process switching flag ( Step 132SGS520). Further, control is executed based on the non-switched process data among the process data specified in step 132SGS218, and the operation confirmation control process is ended (step 132SGS521).

In addition, in step 132SGS512, if the process data specified in step 132SGS511 is not completed data, the production control CPU 120 detects the detection position of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body. At the same time as storing (step 132SGS530), the malfunctioning movable body is identified from the detection results of the production position sensors (production position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C). Then, it is stored as a motion limited movable body (step 132SGS531). Further, the operation check execution flag is cleared (step 132SGS532), and it is determined whether the process switching flag is set (step 132SGS533).

If the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmed flag is set (step 132SGS534), and control is executed to switch all control process data to production control process data (lower level) to perform operation confirmation control processing. When the process switching flag is set (step 132SGS535), the process switching flag is cleared (step 132SGS536), and if the type is cold start, the control process data for sound output control is produced. Control to switch to the control process data (lower level) is executed (step 132SGS536a). In addition, the chance button and the movable body on the panel are identified as the movable bodies to be operated, and the process data (upper) for operation after confirmation is set (step 132SGS537), and the timer count of the process timer (upper) for operation after confirmation is set. Then, the operation control of the chance button and the movable body on the board and the LED light emission control are started (step 132SGS538). Further, the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set and the operation confirmation control process is ended (step 132SGS539).

In addition, if the post-confirmation action execution flag is set in step 132SGS501, the production control CPU 120 subtracts -1 from the value of the post-confirmation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS540), and after the subtraction The process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value is specified (step 132SGS541). Then, it is determined whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS542).

If the specified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the specified process data is data corresponding to the performance position (step 132SGS543). If the specified process data is not the data corresponding to the performance position, the operation confirmation control process is terminated, and if the specified process data is the data corresponding to the performance position, the chance button 631B and the performance position sensor of the on-board movable body 32A are activated. The detection results of (protrusion position sensor 635D and performance position sensor 132SG124) are stored and the operation confirmation control process is ended (step 132SGS544).

In addition, when the specified process data is completion data, the production control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the chance button 631B and the origin position sensors (the origin position sensor 635C and the origin position sensor 132SG123) of the on-board movable body 32A, and ( Step 132SGS545), it is determined whether the chance button 631B is placed at the origin position (Step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is placed at the origin position, the process advances to step 132SGS548; if the chance button 631B is not placed at the origin position, the chance button 631B is stored as a motion-limiting movable body and the process proceeds to step 132SGS548 (step 132SGS547).

In step 132SGS548, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the on-board movable body 32A is placed at the origin position. If the movable body 32A on the panel is located at the origin position, the process advances to step 132SGS550, and if the movable body 32A on the panel is not located at the origin position, the movable body 32A on the panel is memorized as a motion-restricted movable body. The process advances to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

In step 132SGS550, the production control CPU 120 executes control to switch the process data of movable body control and LED light emission control to production control process data (lower level). Then, the operation check execution flag is cleared and the operation check control process is ended (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and the operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in FIG. Control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the process data for operation confirmation (upper level), and display control is executed based on the process data for performance control (lower level).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 34(B), during the execution period of the switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, the movable body control and the LED light emission control are performed based on the operation confirmation process data (upper level). Display control and sound output control are executed based on the production control process data (lower level).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 34(C), during the execution period of the post-confirmation operation control, the operation control of the chance button 631B and the movable body on the panel (movable body control), and the LED light emission control are performed using the process data for the post-confirmation operation. Display control and sound output control are executed based on the production control process data (lower level).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 28 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. As a preview, there is a pending display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the display mode of the pending display, and one variable display of the second special symbol in time saving state A and four times of the second special symbol immediately after that. It is possible to display a panel image on the image display device 5 with the variable display as a target, and execute a panel effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot at different ratios depending on the display mode of these panel images. There is. In addition, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the pending display is set as a pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory of the performance target in the start winning reception command buffer 132SGS194A. , When it is decided to execute the panel display effect, by setting a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the panel display as a panel display flag value corresponding to the reserved memory of the effect target in the start winning reception command buffer 132SGS194A. , it is sufficient to start displaying these pending displays and panel displays (see FIG. 10(B)).

Further, the performance control CPU 120 executes a result performance execution process (step 132SGS162). In the result performance execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred since the first hit occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are counted, and the final variable display in the time saving state (time saving state A is immediately after the end of the time saving state) is performed. When the four variable displays) are completed and the control is returned to the normal state (during the pattern confirmation period), the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are displayed on the image display device 5. Performs processing to execute result effects. In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the time saving state C2 is controlled, the result performance may be exceptionally executed from the symbol confirmation period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol to the 11th variable display. be.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes a rush performance execution process (step 132SGS163). In the rush performance execution process, for example, a rush performance is executed to notify that the time saving state has been controlled from the ending performance of the jackpot game to the first variable display after the jackpot game.

After executing the process of step 132SGS163, the production control CPU 120 executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, and step 132SGS177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example. Select and execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 sends commands (first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command, third symbol confirmation command, Based on receiving either the confirmation command or the fourth symbol confirmation command, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped for the symbol confirmation period indicated by the symbol confirmation command.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command specifying to start a jackpot game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11 at the end of the symbol confirmation period. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to "4". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small winning game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6", which is a value corresponding to the small winning performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

The small hit production process in step 132SGS176 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "7" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step 132SGS177 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "7". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 35. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received. Determination is made (step 132SGS601). When the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure hold memory in the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A are transferred to the buffer. The number is shifted upward by one number (step 132SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased. Furthermore, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process ends. After executing step 132SGS602, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605), and determines the stop symbol of the decorative pattern according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. is determined (step 132SGS606).

Then, the production control CPU 120 performs a time saving remaining number display process (step 132SGS608) for displaying the remaining time saving control number (remaining time saving number) in the time saving state on the image display device 5, and performs a time saving control remaining number of times displaying a predetermined number of times in the time saving state. In this case, time saving end countdown display processing (step 132SGS609) for displaying a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time saving control ends (countdown effect, also referred to as time saving end countdown) on the image display device 5, during variable display A variable display preview performance determination process (step 132SGS610) is executed to execute a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variable pattern, gaming state, and variable display result (step 132SGS611), and starts a process timer (step 132SGS612).

In addition, each process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Note that, as will be described later, in this feature section 132SG, a mode in which the remaining number of time savings is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this; B, time saving state C2, time saving state B, or time saving state C2, and if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage etc. during the variable display, the power Even if the system recovers, the display of the remaining number of time savings will not be restarted during the relevant variable display, and even if the display of the remaining number of time savings is restarted at the start of the next variable display (timing when the value of the time savings counter is updated). good. In addition, when the power is being controlled in any of the time saving state B, time saving state C2, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, but there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed (while waiting for a customer), the power supply is interrupted. Even if it is stopped, the display of the remaining number of time savings will not be restarted even when the power is restored, and the remaining number of time savings will be displayed from the variable display at the start of the next variable display or after the value of the time savings counter is updated. All you have to do is restart.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (chance button 631B, etc.) are controlled (132SGS613). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (132SGS614). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (132SGS615). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (132SGS616).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each reduced by 1. Then, control of the presentation device is executed according to the value of the process timer, variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and decorative pattern is displayed according to the value of the variable display time timer. What is necessary is to stop the variable display of and set the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (S173).

(Flow of performance)
Next, the flow of presentation in the variable display in the feature section 132SG will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 37, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach effect is started by the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol and a predetermined period has elapsed, a part of the ready-to-reach effect is started. As a result, an operation promotion image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect in which the under-board movable body 32B operates as part of the reach effect. After this is executed, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (X6 to X10). Thereafter, after a notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the variable display result has become a jackpot, the jackpot game state is indicated to the player by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area. Accordingly, a right hit notification that informs that these game balls are in a state to be entered into the big winning hole and a round performance during a round game are displayed (X11 to X13).

When the jackpot game is a jackpot game with jackpot A, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, when the jackpot game ends, a rush effect A is executed to indicate that the time-saving state A has been controlled through the jackpot ending effect. Ru. During the execution of the entry effect A, if there is a hold memory of the first special figure, variable display based on the hold memory of the first special figure will be executed in an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). be done. In addition, in addition to being controlled to the time-saving state A, as the rush performance A, the time-saving state A launches the game ball toward the right gaming area for the player, so that the game ball enters the second starting prize opening. A right hit notification is executed to notify that the player has won a prize and is in a state where the variable display of the second special figure is executed (A1 to A4).

When the player hits the game ball toward the right game area according to the entry effect A, the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, and variable display of the second special symbol is started. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure as a panel effect. Then, when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole by the player continuing to hit the game ball toward the right gaming area, the image display device 5 displays a panel corresponding to each pending memory of the second special symbol as a panel effect. Additional images will be displayed. Incidentally, a maximum of five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special figure being executed and the maximum number of reserved storage numbers ("4") of the second special figure.

When one variable display of the second special figure in the time-saving state A is completed, the gaming state is controlled from the time-saving state A to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory of the second special figure is changed. will be started. In the variable display, when the decorative symbols stop at a reach combination, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (A8 to A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small hit, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect in which the under-board movable body 32B operates is executed. After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a small hit. Thereafter, an image ("Aim for V!" is displayed on the image display device 5) instructing the player to cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area. images) are displayed (B1 to B3).

When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image, the second count switch is activated in the image display device 5. After an image is displayed that informs that the 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small hit game, that is, that a V winning has occurred, an image that shows that the game is controlled to a jackpot game is displayed (B4 to B5 ).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a loss, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop at the combination indicating a loss, and the variable display result is lost. It is reported that this is the case. Thereafter, in the variable display corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memory of the second special figure, after the image display device 5 is notified of the number of variable display times of the remaining second special figure, the number of variable displays of the second special figure is changed. Images similar to the first reserved memory are displayed (B6 to B8).

If all the variable displays corresponding to the hold memory of the second special figure are off, the second special figure is held on the image display device 5 during the symbol confirmation period of the last variable display of the second special figure. An image (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END...") indicating that all variable displays according to the memory have been completed is displayed. Thereafter, the variable display of the first special figure is executed 10 times while the dedicated stage image is being displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the left gaming area is also displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). (B9-B12).

In any of the time saving states, when the player hits the game ball into the right game area, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. After the jackpot game via the small hit of these second special symbols ends, the time saving state B or the time saving state C2 is controlled.
As will be described later, if the power is interrupted and restored during the period shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to (A4), the image display device 5 will display the restoration in progress display up to FIG. The initial operation is performed. In addition, if the power is interrupted and restored immediately before the end of FIG. 38 (A4) (within 5 seconds until the end) and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period of FIG. 38 (A5), the image display device 5 From FIG. 38 (A6) onwards, the restoration display is displayed (the timing at which the restoration display is hidden is shown in FIGS. 39 (B3) and (B7)), and the movable body performs an initial operation for 26 seconds. In addition, when the power is interrupted and restored in FIG. 38 (A5), the restoration in progress display is displayed until the image display device 5 starts the variable display corresponding to the second panel, and the initial 26-second display by the movable body is The operation (the first time-saving variation time is longer than 26 seconds) is performed. In addition, if the power is interrupted and restored in Figure 38 (A10) (5 seconds or more until the end of the fluctuation) (missing pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration in progress display up to Figure 38 (B7), and the movable body , up to FIG. 39 (B6), the initial operation in the normal mode is performed, and from FIG. 39 (B7), the initial operation in the shortened mode (taking into account the button effect) is performed. In addition, when the power is interrupted and restored in Figure 38 (A10) (hit pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration image up to Figure 39 (B3), and the movable body displays the normal image up to Figure 39 (B2). 39 (B3), the initial operation of the shortened mode (taking into account "Aim for V") is performed.The light emission mode of the under-panel movable body LED 9e when the under-panel movable body 32B is in operation is as follows. The initial operation is different from that shown in FIG. 39 (B1).

In addition, if the power is interrupted and restored in FIG. 39 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the variable display ends) and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period of FIG. 39 (B5), the image display device 5 will start the power. After the display period of the preparation display has elapsed, "Aim for V" can be visually confirmed, and the movable body prepares to start based on the main command (small hit start designation command and small hit open designation command) received in Figure 39 (B3). The initial operation after display/hide is changed to a shortened mode. In addition, the opening of the big prize opening starts during the display period of the startup preparation display. In addition, if the power is interrupted and restored in FIG. 39 (B3) (at the start (2 seconds remaining until the next round)), the image display device 5 will display the open designation command (second round) after V winning (round 1). ) Until the reception, the special mode (notifying you that you have won a small prize) is displayed during recovery, the movable body performs the initial operation of the normal mode (completed by the start of the next round), and the big prize opening is activated. The release starts during the display period of the preparation display.

When the time saving state B is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A or small win B, first, as shown in FIG. As a variable display of the figure, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in combinations indicating small wins. Thereafter, an image ("Aim for V!" is displayed on the image display device 5) instructing the player to cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area. image) is displayed. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image, the second count switch is activated in the image display device 5. After an image notifying that the 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small winning game, that is, that a V winning has occurred, is displayed, an image indicating that the jackpot game will be controlled (the "FEVER" image) is displayed. are displayed (C1 to C4).

Next, when the jackpot game via the small win ends, an image corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ending effect. Then, after the rush effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes depending on the number of times the time saving state has been controlled, the first variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state B is performed. will be started. In the time saving state B, the variable display of decorative symbols is executed while the background image of the night city (second background display) is being displayed on the image display device 5 (C5 to C8).

In addition, if the 7 variable displays (7 variable displays of the 2nd special symbol) are completed without the variable display result being either a jackpot or a small hit in the time saving state B, the 7th variable display ends. The result effect is started during the display symbol confirmation period. In addition, as the result performance, a value is displayed according to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any time-saving state, and the total number of prize balls won. In addition, if there is a pending memory of the second special symbol at the start of the result production, the second special symbol will be displayed variablely up to four times depending on the remaining pending memory of the second special symbol (remaining pending memory). is executed in an extremely short special figure variation time (0.5 seconds) (C9 to C11).

If there is no big hit or small hit in any of the variable displays according to the remaining pending memory, the image display device 5 starts displaying the stage background image, and the game continues for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). An image instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the left game area is also displayed. Thereafter, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until the ten variable displays are completed (C12 to C14).

In addition, when the time saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the jackpot game via the small hit, that is, when the time saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot E, first, it is the same as the case where the time saving state B is controlled. In addition, a stop display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win, a display of an image displaying "Aim for V!" on the image display device 5, and a display of an image notifying that a V win has occurred during a small win game. , displaying an image (image of "FEVER") indicating that the jackpot game is controlled, displaying an image according to the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game, displaying an image according to the number of times the time-saving state has already been controlled. Entering effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the device 5 is different, a decorative pattern variable display is executed seven times with the second background display being displayed (C1 to C9 in FIG. 40)

Here, as shown in FIG. 41, when the variable display result is neither a jackpot nor a small hit and the seventh variable display of the decorative pattern (the seventh variable display of the second special symbol) ends, the seventh The result presentation is started during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display. In addition, as the result performance, a value is displayed according to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any time-saving state, and the total number of prize balls won. Further, during the execution period of the result production, variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is performed three times in an extremely short special symbol variation time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result is neither a jackpot nor a small hit in the three variable displays of decorative symbols (the 8th to 10th variable displays), the variable display of the decorative symbols will be repeated (the 11th variable display). ) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the variable display result is neither a jackpot nor a small hit in the 11th variable display, the image display device 5 emits light according to the movement of the on-board movable body 32A together with the movement of the on-board movable body 32A. The effect image is displayed. After the on-board movable body 32A falls, when the on-board movable body 32A returns to the standby position before falling (the position above the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes dark (black). Is displayed. After the dark display ends, an image indicating that the time saving state has not ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, an operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, the image display device 5 confirms that the number of times of time saving control in the time saving state is 685, that is, the time saving control period is substantially During the time saving state, a V stock effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win. Thereafter, when the V stock effect ends with the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays are started while the second background display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (D7 to D9). In particular, as shown in FIG. 41 (D2) to FIG. 41 (D8), in the V stock performance from the result performance during the time saving state C2, unlike the result performance according to the time saving state B, the result performance ends. In order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time-saving control will continue to be executed, the right-hitting notification image at the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden. Note that the right-handed hit notification image at the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is restarted from the start timing of the 12th variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
As shown in FIGS. 37 to 41, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided at the bottom center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the active display area 132SG013 is provided on the left side corresponding to the first reserved memory. A first reservation display area 132SG011 is provided. For example, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol being executed, the active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and in response to the fact that the value of the first reserved memory number is 4, the active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013. Four first pending displays 132SG001 are displayed side by side in the first pending display area 132SG011.

Further, when the gaming state is a time saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided at the lower left side of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a second pending display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second pending memory is provided above it. (See Figure 92). For example, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, the active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013 provided at the left end of the display area, and the value of the second reserved memory number is 4. Correspondingly, four second hold displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second hold display area 132SG012.

In this embodiment, since the winning order is used, if the second pending memory is stored in the normal gaming state, the second pending display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first pending display area 132SG011, and in the time saving state. When the second pending memory is stored in , the first pending display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second pending display area 132SG012, but for example, the first pending display 132SG001 and the first pending display 132SG001 are 2 pending display 132SG002 may be displayed.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, a small number corresponding to the first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), the second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and the decorative pattern is displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying symbols (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, the above-mentioned first pending memory number, second pending memory number, pending display, small symbol, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, time saving remaining display 132SG201, right play promotion display 132SG430 For example, by displaying on the front side (upper layer) than the effect images such as characters, the effect images overlap and the visibility of the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, small symbols, and error displays is reduced. On the other hand, by displaying the decorative designs on the back side (lower layer) of the performance images, it is possible to prevent the decorative designs from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images. You can do it like this.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, the performance contents including the variable display of the decorative symbol may disappear from the screen for a moment, and the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B may be moved to the image display device 5. Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a display is performed that blocks all or part of the screen, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The performance control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Further, the performance control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth symbol display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, is provided. The pattern displayed on the device is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable body will be explained based on FIGS. 42 to 44. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the movable body on the board is located at the origin position, and (B) showing a state in which it is located at the production position. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the production position. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a state in which (A) the movable body on the frame and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the movable body on the frame and the chance button are located at the production position.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, on the front side of the game board 2, an above-board movable body 32A and a below-board movable body 32B are provided. These on-board movable body 32A and under-board movable body 32B are also referred to as "board side movable bodies" since they are provided on the game board 2. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44, the opening/closing door frame 3a is provided with a frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B. The frame movable body 132SG101 and the chance button 631B are also referred to as "frame side movable bodies" because they are provided on the opening/closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that cannot be contacted by the player when the opening/closing door frame 3a is in the closed state, and the frame-side movable body is provided so that it can be contacted by the player when the opening/closing door frame 3a is in the closed state. It is a movable body.

As shown in FIG. 42, the on-board movable body 32A is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and includes a production section 32a on which characters "XXX" are displayed on the front surface, and a support that supports the production section 32a from the left and right sides. portion 32b, and is provided to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A is positioned between the origin position at the front upper part of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. It is movable between a presentation position approximately in the front center of the display screen, and a portion (lower part) overlaps with the display area at the origin position, and the entire area overlaps with the display area at the presentation position.

Further, the on-board movable body 32A is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG123, and at the production position by the production position sensor 132SG124. Furthermore, a plurality of on-board movable body LEDs 9d are provided inside, and these on-board movable body LEDs 9d enable the front surface to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 43, the underboard movable body 32B has a shape that roughly resembles a "fist" when viewed from the front, and includes a presentation section 32c with decorations displayed on the front, and a support section 32d that supports the presentation section 32c from below. It is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the underboard movable body 32B. Specifically, the under-panel movable body 32B is located between the origin position of the front lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. It is movable between a presentation position approximately at the front center of the display screen, and a portion (the upper part) overlaps with the display area at the origin position, and the entire area overlaps with the display area at the presentation position.

Further, the under-board movable body 32B is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 132SG133, and at the production position by the production position sensor 132SG134. Moreover, a plurality of under-panel movable body LEDs 9e are provided inside, and these under-panel movable body LEDs 9e enable the front surface to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 44, the first production unit 132SG100 includes a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 provided to protrude upward and forward from the upper side of the door frame 3a, and a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 provided on the front side of the base member 132SG105 in the vertical direction. It has a frame movable body 132SG101 that is movably provided. The frame movable body 132SG101 has a shape that imitates a character (not shown) displayed in various performances of the pachinko game machine 1, and on the back side, there is a frame decoration part 132SG111L that has a shape that imitates the character's wings. , 132SG111R are operably provided.

The first production unit 132SG100 includes a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG102 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame movable body 132SG101, and a frame movable body 132SG101 located at the origin position. an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the movable body 132SG101 on the frame is located at the production position; A drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits to the decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R, an origin position sensor 132SG113 for detecting that the frame decoration parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the origin position, and a frame upper A performance position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the decoration parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the performance position, and a frame movable body LED9f for causing the front surface of the frame movable body 132SG101 and the frame decoration parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R to emit light. It has .

In this way, the frame movable body 132SG101 moves up and down between the origin position shown in FIG. 44(A) and the production position shown in FIG. It is possible to move in the direction. In addition, the frame decoration parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R change into a non-deployed mode in which they are stored at the origin position on the left and right sides of the back of the frame movable body 132SG101, and a deployed mode in which they protrude to spread to the production position on the upper left and right sides of the back surface. It is possible to change from a non-deployment mode to a deployment mode in response to the upward movement of the movable body on the frame 132SG101, and from a deployment mode to a non-deployment mode in response to the downward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the chance button 631B is made of a cylindrical member with an operation surface formed on the upper part, and is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the base part 600A formed on the upper part of the operation unit 600. ing. Specifically, the chance button 631B is located between the origin position where the operation surface protrudes slightly upward from the base portion 600A (see FIG. 44(A)) and the operation detection position where the operation surface is below the origin position. It is movable in the vertical direction and is biased upward so that it is always held at the origin position, and when the button sensor 635B moves from the origin position to the operation detection position by the player's pressing operation, the pressing operation is detected by the button sensor 635B. It is now detected by

In addition, the chance button 631B is moved between the origin position (see FIG. 44(A)) and the operation surface by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a forward/backward motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the forward/backward motor 635F to the chance button 631B. It is possible to move up and down between a production position where is above the origin position. In other words, the chance button 631B can be changed into a first operable state located at the origin position and a second operable state located at the production position by the forward/backward motor 635F, and the first operable state and the second operable state In any state, it is possible to perform a pressing operation up to the operation detection position.

Further, the chance button 631B is detected at the origin position by the origin position sensor 635C, at the operation detection position by the button sensor 635B, and at the production position by the protrusion position sensor 635D. Further, a plurality of chance button LEDs 9g are provided inside, and the operation surface can emit light by these chance button LEDs 9g.

In this embodiment, the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2 is exemplified by the board-side movable body 32A and the board-bottom movable body 32B, and the frame-side movable body provided at the opening/closing door frame 3a is a chance button. 631B and the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board side movable bodies and frame side movable bodies are not limited to those described above, and the number and position , form, and operation mode can be changed in various ways.

[Various performances]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained based on FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. In FIG. 46, (A) is a diagram showing performances that can be executed during the SP reach variable display period, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of performances that can be executed in the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of effects. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "pre-read movable object notice" that indicates the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the start of the variable display (also referred to as target variation) that is the subject of the pre-read notice. It is.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 provides a "start notice", a "pseudo continuous notice", a "movable body notice", and a "reach notice" as preview performances that suggest that the variable display will be controlled to be a jackpot. and "button notice" can be executed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a "win/fail button performance" as a deciding performance to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled in the variable display based on the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E, etc.). is possible.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "fanfare performance", a "round performance", a "promotion performance", and an "ending performance" as jackpot performances that can be executed in the jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "time-saving medium performance" and a "result performance" as time-saving performances that can be executed in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C as special states.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "customer waiting demonstration performance" as a standby performance that can be executed in a standby state where no game is being played.

As shown in FIG. 46(A), for example, the variable display mode of "start notice", "movable object notice/pseudo continuous notice", and "reach notice/button notice" becomes N reach mode and N reach effect. It is a performance that can be executed before the is executed or before the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed in the SP ready-to-reach mode. Furthermore, the "win/fail button performance" is a performance that can be executed in the latter half of the SP reach performance.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the "fanfare effect" is executed during the fanfare period during which the player waits from the start of control of the jackpot game state until the start of the round game in which the big prize opening is opened. , "Round performance" is executed during the period when the opening control of the big winning hole is executed in a round game where the big winning hole repeats an open state and a closed state, and "interval performance" is a round game in which the big winning hole repeats an open state and a closed state. It is executed during the period when the mouth closing control is executed, and the "ending performance" is executed during the ending period from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game state. These fanfare period, round game period, and ending period are managed by the CPU 103. In addition, in the first round of jackpots C, D, and E, the big winning opening is opened in a small winning opening pattern (opening and closing are repeated for a short period of time).

In addition, the "promotion performance" is performed during the special round interval period from the end of the opening period of the third round of the big winning hole in jackpots C, D, and E until the opening period of the fourth round starts. .

(Pre-read movable body notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "pre-reading movable object notice" is the target of the pre-reading notice performance that is executed before the variable display of the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice performance (hereinafter referred to as target variation) is executed. This is an effect in which the on-board movable body 32A operates in a plurality of variable displays corresponding to pending memories that have not been displayed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (A1), a starting winning occurs when the variable display is being executed with the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol being "2", and the starting winning occurs. If it is decided to execute a pre-read movable object notice based on the fact that the variable display based on the previous retained memory is out of reach (that is, the special figure variation time is 12 seconds or less), the variable display will be stopped. (See FIG. 47 (A2)), when the suspended memory is consumed and variable display starts, the movable body 32A on the panel vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the panel An effect display 132SG401 that emphasizes the upper movable body 32A is displayed and a sound effect is output (see FIG. 47 (A3)), and then the upper movable body 32A returns to the original position by the time the variable display is stopped (FIG. 47 (A4) )reference). This operation occurs when the variable display that is executed before the start of the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the suspended memory that is the target of the pre-read preview effect, and when the variable display that is executed before the start of the variable display (target variation) that is the target of the pre-read preview effect. This is executed when the variable display (target variation) based on the suspended memory that has changed is started (see FIGS. 47 (A5) to (A7)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-reading movable object notice is exemplified as an effect pattern that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays until the target change starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute a low-expectation performance pattern in which the pre-read movable object notice ends before the target change starts. Further, it may be possible to execute a plurality of production patterns with different jackpot expectations depending on the moving speed when the board movable body 32A descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(Notice at start)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "start notice" is an effect that suggests whether or not the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display starts. The standard color of the active display 132SG003 is white, which can be changed to blue, green, or red, and the expected level of jackpot is indicated by the color displayed at the end of the start notice. . In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a performance pattern that ends in white, a performance pattern that ends in blue, a performance pattern that ends in green, and a performance pattern that ends in red, and the jackpot is expected in the order of white, blue, green, and red. It is said to be a highly effective production pattern.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B1), when it is decided to execute the start notice with the start of the variable display, the entire display area turns off or becomes dark with low brightness, and A character display 132SG402 of "!!" is displayed at approximately the middle position of the display area (see FIG. 48 (B2)). Next, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become bright (see FIG. 48 (B3)).

In the case of a production pattern that ends in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or is enlarged, and after the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white in FIG. 48 (B3), When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a character display 132SG403 of "?" is displayed above the active display 132SG003 to notify that the final display color is white (see FIG. 48 (B3a)).

In the case of a production pattern that ends in blue, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged (see FIG. 48 (B4)), and in FIG. 48 (B3), the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are enlarged. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the surrounding area was displayed in white, the active display 132SG003 cracks and the character display 132SG404 "!?" is displayed, informing that the final display color is blue (Fig. 48 ( See B4a)).

In the case of a production pattern that ends in green, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes stepwise in the order of white, blue, and green and is enlarged (see FIGS. 48 (B4) and (B5)). 48 (B3), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white, the active display 132SG003 cracked and the word "heat" 132SG405 was displayed, and the final display color was green. Something is notified (see FIG. 48 (B5a)).

In the case of a production pattern that ends in red, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes stepwise in the order of white, blue, green, and red, and after being enlarged (see FIGS. 48 (B4) to (B6)) ), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in FIG. (See FIG. 48 (B6a)).

In this way, the "start notice" has an introductory part as a period to announce whether or not the hold display will change (see Figure 48 (B2) to (B6)), and a period to notify the result of the change in the hold display. A result notification part (see FIGS. 48 (B3a), (B4a), (B5a), and (B6a)) is included.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the form in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by changing the display mode such as the display color and size of the active display 132SG003 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The expectation level of a jackpot may be suggested by changing the display mode other than the display color and size. Further, the expectation level of a jackpot may be suggested by changing the display mode of not only the active display 132SG003 but also the first pending display 132SG001 and the second pending display 132SG002. Furthermore, the display color and size change patterns are not limited to those described above, and other change patterns may be executable.

(Movable object notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "movable body notice" indicates that the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position before the pseudo-coupled effect described later is executed in the variable display. At the same time, the chance button 631B vibrates. The performance patterns of the movable object preview are the "vibration (small) pattern" where the vertical vibration width is small, and the "vibration (large) pattern" where the vertical vibration width is larger than the vibration (small) and the jackpot expectation is high. Yes, and one of non-execution, "vibration (small) pattern", and "vibration (large) pattern" is determined according to the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (C1), when it is decided to execute the movable object notice with the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the start of the pseudo continuous effect, the movable object on the board The body 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see FIG. 49 (C2)). Furthermore, an effect display 132SG407 that emphasizes the on-board movable body 32A is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a production sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this embodiment, a form in which a movable object notice is executed in a variable display where a pseudo continuous effect is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A movable object notice may also be executed in a display (for example, a non-reach variation pattern).

Furthermore, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (pattern A) before the start of the operation of the chance button 631B in the initial operation, which will be described later, or together with the advance operation. In addition, as a performance during fluctuation, the vibration motor 635E is operated (pattern B) to suggest the level of expectation, and the vibration motor 635E is operated (pattern C) as a decoration (enjoyment) when a jackpot is hit or when the movable body is operating. Is possible. These patterns A, B, and C each have different vibration modes (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, and movement time) and lamp modes (pattern A: initial emphasis, pattern B: high-speed white flashing, high-speed red flashing, pattern C: Rainbow color, lighting in a color corresponding to the effect displayed when moving the movable object) and sound output mode (Pattern A: Initialization notification or silence, Pattern B: BGM during fluctuation, Pattern C: Congratulation sound at jackpot) , moving body performance sound) are different.

In addition, as will be described later, the initial emphasis mode is a light emission pattern (brightness, light emission time, etc.) exclusively for the initial operation, so it is a light emission pattern that is not used in all production operation controls (Fig. 56 (B) reference).

(Pseudo consecutive notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "pseudo continuous notice" refers to whether or not the variable display resumes after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This is a performance that stimulates whether or not to make it look like multiple variable displays. There are two types of pseudo consecutive effects: a double pattern in which the variable display is restarted twice, and a triple pattern in which the variable display is restarted three times and has a higher jackpot expectation than the double pattern, and the variable display results Depending on the pattern, either a two-sequence pattern or a three-series pattern is determined.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (C1), when a variable display in which a pseudo continuous notice is executed is started, and when it is decided to execute a movable body notice, a movable body notice is executed. (See FIG. 49(C2)). After that, the decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 49 (C3)), and a number that is one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed. After the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 49 (C4)), the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is displayed in the middle decoration. The display is decelerated before the stop display position in the symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 49 (C5)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive notice is executed, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that (see FIG. 49(C6)), the variable display of the decorative symbols is restarted in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 49(C7)). On the other hand, in the case of a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive notice is not executed, a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is displayed at the stop display position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C. The variable display result of the error is displayed (see FIG. 49 (C10)).

In addition, in FIG. 49 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo consecutive notice of a double pattern, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display is continued in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. The decorative pattern that has been displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 49 (C8)), and the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. It becomes a reach mode (see FIG. 49 (C9)) and develops into an SP reach effect. In addition, in FIG. 49 (C7), after the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed, in the case of a pseudo consecutive notice of a triple pattern, the flow of FIGS. 49 (C3) to (C7) is repeated, and then the At 49 (C8) and (C9), it becomes a reach mode and develops into an SP reach effect.

In this way, the "pseudo consecutive notice" consists of an introductory part that is a period for inciting whether or not the variable display will be resumed (see Figure 49 (C3) to (B5)), and a part that is used as a period to incite whether or not the variable display will be resumed. and a result notification part (see FIGS. 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9)) as a period for reporting.

(Reach notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "reach notice" starts after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, and after the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are stopped and displayed, the left ornamental symbols are displayed. This is an effect that stimulates whether or not a decorative pattern having the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the area 5L is stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, that is, whether or not it becomes a ready-to-win mode.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (D1), after the variable display is started, the decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed (FIG. 50 (D1)). (see D2)), before the stop display position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, which is variably displayed, the deceleration display of the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is started. (See FIG. 50 (D3)). Then, when an operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation valid period after the deceleration display starts, or when no operation is detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, if the reach mode does not occur, the left decoration A decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5L passes through the stop display position, and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 50 (D4), (D5), and (D7)), In the case of the reach mode, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed at the stopped display position (see FIGS. 50 (D4), (D5), and (D6)). ).

In addition, the reach mode refers to the combination of multiple decorative symbols (for example, "333", ), while the decorative patterns (e.g., the left and right patterns, etc.) excluding one of the decorative patterns (e.g., the middle pattern, etc.) are stopped and displayed, the variable display of that one decorative pattern (e.g., the middle pattern, etc.) is performed. This is the manner in which this is done (also referred to as reach performance).

(Button notice)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "button notice" is a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L in the right decorative symbol display area 5R when the above-mentioned reach notice is executed. This is an effect that is executed during a period from when the deceleration display is started until a predetermined operational validity period has elapsed, and promotes button operation to determine whether or not to enter the ready-to-reach mode.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 (D4) and (D5), the operation of the chance button 631B is prompted from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the elapse of a predetermined operation validity period. This is an operation promotion effect, which is started by displaying an operation promotion display and a button image imitating the chance button 631B, and is started when an operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the operation validity period, or when the operation is detected. First, when the operation validity period has elapsed, the operation promotion display and the button image become hidden and the operation ends.

The production pattern (operation promotion mode) of the button notice is a "long press pattern" that encourages long press operation of the chance button 631B over a predetermined operation period, and a "long press pattern" that encourages continuous press operation of the chance button 631B over a predetermined operation period. There is a "repeated hit pattern" and a "single hit pattern" that prompts you to press the chance button 631B once. Depending on the variable display result, you can choose between non-execution, "long press pattern", "repeated hit pattern", and "single hit pattern". Either one is decided. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to those described above, and four or more types, or two or less types may be set. The operation promotion display becomes ``Long press!'' in the ``Long press pattern'', ``Continuous press!'' in the ``Multiple hit pattern'', and ``Press!'' in the ``Single hit pattern''.

In this way, the "button notice" includes an operation promotion part as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 50 (D5)), and a period for notifying the result of whether or not the reach mode has been reached by operation. and a result notification part (see FIGS. 50 (D6) and (D7)).

(Acceptance button performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "win/fail button effect" promotes the button operation to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot at the end of the SP reach effect in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, and This is a performance that announces the result of whether or not the result will be achieved.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (E1), for example, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, the reach title, which is the type of SP reach effect, is announced, and the SP reach effect (for example, between an ally character and an enemy character) is announced. 51 (E2) and (E3)), a "Press" message prompting the user to operate the chance button 631B is displayed from the timing when the battle is resolved until the predetermined operation validity period has elapsed. !!'' and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B are displayed (see FIG. 51 (E4)).

Then, when an operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has passed, the operation promotion display 132SG411 and the button display 132SG412 are hidden and the process ends. . If the variable display result is a jackpot, the lower movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the production position while the movable LED 9e lights up in a predetermined color, and the effect display 132SG413 emphasizes the lower movable body 32B. is displayed and a predetermined production sound effect is output to notify that the jackpot game state is being controlled (see FIG. 51 (E5)). After that, an image (not shown) indicating that the ally character won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmed symbol combination is stopped and displayed to notify that the jackpot has been achieved (Fig. 51 ( (See E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the underboard movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the production position, and the display 132SG414 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. , it is reported that the variable display result is a failure (see (E10) to (E12) in FIG. 51).

In addition, there are two production patterns: one in which the chance button 631B moves from the origin position to the production position and an operation promotion display is displayed, and the other in which the chance button 631B moves from the origin position to the production position and the operation promotion display is displayed. It is said that it is possible to execute a performance pattern that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the case of the game. Furthermore, the presentation patterns are not limited to those described above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/fail button presentation" includes an operation promotion part as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 51 (E4)), and a variable display result displayed by the under-board movable body 32B to determine whether or not the result is a jackpot. and a result notification part (see FIGS. 51 (E5) and (E10)) as a period for notifying the results.

(Fanfare performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "fanfare performance" is a performance that notifies information regarding the controlled jackpot after the jackpot game state is controlled and before the round game starts. In addition, the information regarding the jackpot is, for example, information regarding the jackpot type, the number of rounds, the number of balls played, the gaming state after the jackpot (time saving states A, B, C1, C2), etc., and does not include information other than these. You can leave it there.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (F1), after the jackpot confirmed symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes a jackpot, when the jackpot gaming state is started, the jackpot is started. A display 132SG420 indicating this is displayed (see FIG. 52 (F2)). In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 54 (A1) and (A2), the frame movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the performance position, and after the jackpot gaming state ends. , is maintained in the production position until the time saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the jackpot type (jackpot A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 constituting "BIG BONUS!!" is displayed in frames from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 by a predetermined number (for example, one character). The display moves to the center of the screen (see FIG. 52 (F3) to (F6)). In addition, in the case of a 3rd round jackpot, the character images constituting "SMALL BONUS!!" move into the frame from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 one by one (for example, one character) and move to the center of the display screen. are displayed (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after displaying a right-hitting promotion display 132SG431 that encourages the player to launch the game ball into the right gaming area (see FIG. 52 (F7)). ), the on-board movable body 32A returns to its original position and displays a right-hitting promotion display 132SG432 indicating that the player is aiming for the big prize opening (see FIG. 52 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare performance" includes an introductory part as a period to notify information about the jackpot (see Fig. 52 (F2) to (F6)), and a part to notify the operating direction of the ball batting operation handle, that is, to perform a right-handed batting operation. and an operation direction notification part (see FIGS. 52 (F7) and (F8)).

(Round performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "round performance" is performed during a round game in which the big prize opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened after the fanfare period ends when the jackpot game state is controlled. This is a performance in which winning information and other information is announced.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 52 (F9) to (F11), for example, during a round game, a character display 132SG450, a round number display 132SG451 indicating the number of rounds, and a number of winning balls in the round game are displayed. The number of winning balls displayed 132SG452, the number of balls paid out from the start of the jackpot game state to the present time 132SG453, and the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls played during the consecutive jackpots/total number of balls played. A display 132SG454 and a right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 that promotes right-hand hitting operations are displayed.

Incidentally, if a jackpot is achieved in the time saving state, the effect "Aim for V!!" shown in FIG. 40 (C2) is executed in the operation direction notification part of FIG. 52 (F8). Also, during the round performance period shown in FIG. 52 (F9), the performance "Aim for V!!" continues to be performed.

Further, the images displayed in the round performance may be moving images, and character explanations, "FINAL BATTLE" explanations, and story performances may be performed in a picture-story show format for each round. For example, if character A's explanation performance is performed in the first round, character B's explanation performance will be performed in the second round, but when the power is restored after a power outage in the middle of the first round, the first The restoration-in-progress display is displayed until the round ends, and then, when the second round starts, the explanatory performance of character A that was performed in the first round is performed again. In the case of a power outage, the performance control CPU 120 does not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so by playing from the beginning in the second round, it is possible to play a game where you want to see the explanatory performance of character A until the end. be able to give consideration to other people.

Further, in the round performance, a PV performance may be performed according to the selected music piece. For example, if the PV production (before the chorus) was performed according to the selected song A in the first round, and there is no change in the song, the PV production according to the selected song A (the chorus part) will continue in the second round. However, after the power was cut off in the middle of the first round, when the power was restored, a recovery indicator was displayed (& silence) until the first round ended, and then when the second round started. PV performance (A melody) corresponding to the selected song A is performed again. In addition, if the selected song A is changed to the selected song B in the first round, the PV production according to the selected song B will be performed in the first round, and then the PV production according to the selected song B will continue in the second round. The performance was performed, but after the power was cut off in the middle of the first round, when the power was restored, a recovery indicator was displayed (& no sound) until the first round ended, and then the second round started. At that time, a PV performance corresponding to the selected song A is performed. In the case of a power outage, the performance control CPU 120 does not remember what was being displayed before the power outage, so in the second round, the PV performance may be performed in accordance with the default selected song A (for example, When the power is restored after a power outage when the ball out display "150" is displayed during one round game, the ball out display displayed during the next round game becomes "0").

(promotion performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "promotion performance" is a jackpot in which the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot display result, that is, a round game in the round interval of the third round game in jackpots C to E. This is a round promotion performance in which it is announced whether or not the jackpot will continue (round promotion) (whether or not the jackpot will be promoted to jackpots D and E (10 rounds), which have a larger number of rounds than jackpot C (3 rounds)).

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (F21), the background image is switched to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the expected number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. The pitch counter display 132SG351 is displayed and the promotion effect is started.

Next, an image of the friendly character attacking the enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball count display 132SG353 (for example, "+50") is displayed depending on the attack, and the displayed expected number of balls is the expected number of balls to be played. It is added to the counter value displayed on the number counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 53 (F22)). When the counter value displayed on the expected pitch count counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B and a message such as "Press!!" are displayed. An operation promotion display 132SG355 and a gauge display 132SG356 indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed, and an operation promotion effect that promotes a single press operation of the chance button 631B is executed (see FIG. 53 (F23)).

Next, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, the timing at which the press operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the predetermined operation validity period has elapsed, or the operation validity period has elapsed without any press operation being detected. At this timing, the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the production position (see Fig. 53 (F24)), the friendly character attacks, and the counter value of the expected pitch counter display 132SG351 is variably displayed (see Fig. 53 (F24)). 53 (F24)), and the enemy character is displayed in a faded-out manner (see FIG. 59 (F25)). Then, the expected pitch count counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500" which is the expected number of pitches that can be obtained in the case of "10R jackpot") is stopped and displayed. , it is announced that the game has been promoted to the 10th round jackpot (see FIG. 53 (F26)).

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, at the timing when the pressing operation of the chance button 631B is detected before the predetermined operation validity period has passed, or at the timing when the operation validity period has passed without any pressing operation being detected. , an image (not shown) in which the lower board movable body 32B did not rise from the origin position to the production position and could not defeat the enemy character was displayed, indicating that it was not a 10-round jackpot, that is, a 10-round jackpot. It is reported that the promotion has failed (see FIG. 53 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion performance" consists of an introduction part (see Figure 53 (F21) to (F23)) as a period to encourage whether or not to be promoted, and a result notification part (see Figure 53) to announce the result of promotion or not (see Figure 53). 53 (F24) to (F27)).

(Ending performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "ending performance" is a performance that notifies the end of the jackpot and information about the gaming state that will be controlled after the jackpot ends.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 52 (F12) to (F14), if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round game ends, after the jackpot ends, " At the same time, it is announced that the "FINAL BATTLE production" will start (controlled to time-saving state A), and the player is encouraged to hit the ball to the right, indicating that he or she should aim at the variable winning ball device 6B by launching the game ball into the right gaming area. Display 132SG430 is displayed.

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, when the third round game ends, it will be announced that the "BATTLE RUSH performance" will start after the jackpot ends (it will be controlled to time saving state C1). (See FIGS. 52 (F32) and (F34)). In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the promotion performance (promotion failure) ends, it will be announced that the "BATTLE RUSH performance" will start after the jackpot ends (it will be controlled to time-saving state B). (See FIGS. 53 (F32) and (F34)). In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the ninth round game ends, the "BATTLE RUSH performance" will start after the jackpot ends (controlled by time saving state B or time saving state C1). 53 (F32) and (F34)).

In this way, the "ending effect" includes an introduction part as an introduction period (see FIGS. 52 (F12) and 53 (F31)), and a time-saving state notification part (FIG. 52 (F13), 53 (F32), (F34)), and an operating direction notification part (see FIG. 52 (F14)) that notifies the operating direction of the ball batting operation handle, that is, to perform a right-hand batting operation.

(Time-saving production)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "time-saving medium performance" is a performance that notifies that the "FINAL BATTLE performance" or "BATTLE RUSH performance" is being executed, that is, that the time-saving state is being controlled ( (See Figures 38 and 40).

(Result performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "result performance" is a performance that notifies the end of the "FINAL BATTLE performance" or the "BATTLE RUSH performance", that is, the end of the time-saving state control (FIG. 39, (See Figure 40). In addition, when the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, the frame movable body 132SG101 descends from the production position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position, as shown in FIGS. 54 (B1) and (B2). be done.

(Customer waiting demonstration performance)
As shown in FIG. 45, the "customer waiting demo performance" is a performance that notifies customers that they are in the customer waiting (playing standby) state. This is an effect that starts when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (G1), after the initial operation is started in the initial operation control process when the power is turned on, when the initial operation ends (FIG. 55 (G2) ), the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G3)). Then, in FIG. 55 (G1), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without any variable display being performed after the power was turned on, the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is hidden, The customer waiting demonstration performance is started (see FIG. 55 (G4)).

In the customer waiting demonstration performance, after a video is displayed that sequentially introduces multiple ally characters A to D (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the contents of the content (Fig. 55 ( G4) to (G7)), while the image of allied characters A to D gathered remains displayed (see Figure 55 (G8)), the movable body 32A on the board descends from the origin position to the production position, and the predetermined time elapses. After the lapse of time, it rises to the origin position (see FIG. 55 (G9) to (G10)), and the first background display 132SG310 representing a daytime city corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image and ends (FIG. 55 ( (See G11)). When the customer waiting demonstration performance ends, a menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 55 (G12)).

Note that when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without any variable display being performed after the customer waiting demonstration performance ended, the customer waiting demonstration performance is started again. Even after that, the customer waiting demonstration performance is performed periodically as long as the waiting state continues. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance may be repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the waiting state, or may not be executed after being executed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which various effects shown in FIG. 45 can be executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than those described above may be executable. Furthermore, the performance mode of each performance can be changed in various ways, and the performance may be performed in a manner other than the above.

[Initial operation control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the sound aspects will be explained based on FIG. 56. In FIG. 56, (A) is a diagram illustrating the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the aspects of lamps and sounds according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in FIG. 56(A), the production control CPU 120 controls the movable bodies (upper board movable body 32A, lower panel movable body 32B, chance button 631B, Initial operation control to initialize the movable body on the frame 132SG101), and use the movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A, under-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101) as a performance in various performances. It is possible to perform effect operation control to operate in a corresponding manner.

"Initial operation control" includes non-detection operation control that returns the movable body to the home position when it is located at a position other than the home position, and non-detection operation control that returns the movable body to the home position when it is located at the home position, and once moves away from the home position when the movable body is located at the home position. "Origin placement control (short initial operation control)" which includes non-detection operation control to return to the origin position from a position far from the origin position, and confirmation operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally. After moving the movable body from the origin position to the production position, it includes "operation confirmation control (long initial operation control)" for moving the movable body from the production position to the origin position.

Specifically, when the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor when the initial operation process is executed, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the movable body has moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, during transportation or installation on the game island). If the return to the origin was not possible during the previous operation (for example, if the movable object cannot be confirmed to have returned to the origin or cannot operate due to motor step-out, failure, or catch during execution of the performance) When the game machine moves from the home position due to vibrations of the game machine, etc.), the game machine moves to a position other than the home position (for example, a predetermined position between the home position and the performance position). If there is, non-detection operation control is executed to return to the origin. When performing this non-detection operation control, since the movable body is located away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable body in the direction of the origin position.

Furthermore, when the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor when executing the initial operation process, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation control at the time of detection. For example, in order to ensure that the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined movement is possible between the time the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time when the movement of the movable body in the direction of the origin position is regulated. In cases where a range (for example, play) is set, the robot may return to the origin and stop at a position further back than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, operation control at the time of detection is performed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state by the origin position sensor, but it is not necessary to move the movable body to the production position. Therefore, the movable body is moved from the original position to a detection operating position near the original position, and then returned to the original position. In other words, the reciprocating motion is performed over a shorter distance than the long initial motion.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the initial operation process. The operation confirmation control process is an operation control to confirm that the movable bodies operate normally, so after moving each movable body from its origin position to the production position farthest from the origin position, It is said that the operation control is to return it to the position. In other words, the movement to the performance position is considered to be the maximum advance movement. In addition, the operation confirmation control process for the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B is the same as the production operation control 3 and 4 described later, but the operation confirmation control process for each movable body is not necessarily limited to either one. It does not have to be the same operation as the production operation control.

"Performance operation control" is an operation control of a movable body in various performances, and includes multiple types of operation control with different types and operation modes of the target movable body. For details, see 1. "Pre-reading" is an operation control in which the on-board movable body 32A is vibrated up and down between the origin position and an intermediate position before a target change such as a pre-read movable body notice is started. 2. "Subject" is an operation control in which the on-board movable body 32A is vibrated up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position in the relevant variation such as a movable body notice, and the chance button 631B is vibrated by the vibration motor 635E. 3. "Jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion" is an operation control in which the underboard movable body 32B is moved from the origin position to the production position and then returned to the origin position in jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion, etc. 4. "Fanfare right hit, customer waiting demonstration performance" is an operation control in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved from the origin position to the performance position and then returned to the original position in fanfare right hit, customer waiting demonstration performance, etc. 5. "Jackpot game state transition" is an operation control for moving the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position when the game state changes from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is an operation control for moving the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position when the game state transitions from the time saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Operation promotion" is an operation control for moving the chance button 631B from the origin position to the performance position in the win/fail button performance.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the short initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 sets the minimum control speed (low speed) set in the operation confirmation control. The movable body is controlled so that it always operates at a single (constant) operating speed based on the Note that these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the movable body, and are not common operation speeds when there are a plurality of movable bodies, so the lowest speeds for each movable body may be different.

Specifically, the first movable body and the other second movable body are different in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, so even if the same control speed is set, The actual speed of movement of the movable body will vary. Furthermore, even when different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies differ. In this way, the minimum speed is the operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and in order to control the movable body to operate at the optimal minimum speed, it is possible to control multiple movable bodies with different modes. It becomes possible to reliably detect the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the performance operation control (for example, the speed at which the movable body is operated in various performances such as the pre-read performance, preview performance, deciding performance, and jackpot performance shown in FIG. Since this is the same speed as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the motion control when performing physical performance, the maximum speed in motion confirmation control is the same as the maximum speed in performance motion control, As long as it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the production operation control do not necessarily have to be the same speed.

(Operation confirmation control (long initial operation control))
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described based on FIG. 57. In FIG. 57, (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of operation of operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the initialization process (cold start process) of step S6 is performed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. When executed, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined startup preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Then, upon receiving a power-on designation command from the main board 11 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3000 ms) has passed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification indicating that the cold start process has been executed starts. At the same time, after a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has elapsed since the initialization notification was started, the movable bodies (on-board movable body 32A, under-panel movable body 32B, chance button 631B, on-frame movable body 132SG101) Initial operation control is started (see FIG. 57(B)). In the initialization notification, as will be described later, each lamp (frame LED 9a, 9b, panel movable body LED 9d, bottom panel movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a predetermined initialization notification mode. At the same time, output of a predetermined initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started (see FIG. 61).

In the initial operation control, first, short initial operation control is performed for each movable body (on-panel movable body 32A, under-panel movable body 32B, chance button 631B, frame on-frame movable body 132SG101), and then operation confirmation control is performed. be exposed. Hereinafter, the illustration of the operation mode based on the short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation mode based on the operation confirmation control will be explained.

In the operation confirmation control, first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops (see FIG. 57(B)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the production position. and stops (see FIG. 57(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the production position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the production position and stops at the origin position. (See FIG. 57(E)). Next, after the board lower movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), the frame upper movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops. (See FIG. 57(G)). Next, after the frame upper movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the presentation position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), the underboard movable body 32B moves downward from the presentation position and stops at the origin position. Then, the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, about 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

In this way, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation of each movable body is started in the order of the chance button 631B, the above-board movable body 32A, the below-disk movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, but the initial operation period of the chance button 631B is The initial operation period of the on-panel movable body 32A overlaps in a part of the panel, and the initial operation control of the frame-on movable body 132SG101 overlaps in a part of the initial operation period of the under-panel movable body 32B. The body motion confirmation control period can be shortened.

In addition, when the operation of another movable body is controlled during the initial motion control of one movable body, while the first movable body (for example, chance button 631B, under-board movable body 32B) is stopped at the production position. Since other movable bodies (for example, the board movable body 32A, the frame movable body 132SG101) move to the production position or origin position, the initial motion control of two or more movable bodies can be executed in parallel. Even when moving, the movement of each movable body can be confirmed.

In addition, although the operation example of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing was explained above based on FIG. 57, in the operation confirmation control during hot start processing, initialization notification by lamp and sound is not performed, but For this, operation confirmation control is performed in the same manner as during cold start processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the movable body LED of a stopped movable body that is not operating in the operation confirmation control blinks in "red" during cold start processing (during initialization notification), During hot start processing (during recovery), it is turned off, and during hot start processing (while variable display is stopped), it is turned on in a manner that corresponds to the background image. On the other hand, the movable body LED of the stopped movable body that is not operating in the performance operation control is lit in a manner "according to the background image." Note that the background image (background display) includes, for example, background images A and B, and when background image A is displayed, if there is a power outage and the power is restored, background image A will always be displayed, and the background image will always be displayed. The lamp is designed to emit light in a manner corresponding to image A.

In addition, during the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation to move from the origin position to the production position and the retraction operation to move from the production position to the origin position is hot during cold start processing (during initialization notification). Lights up in "white" both during start processing (during recovery) and hot start processing (while variable display is stopped). On the other hand, in performance operation control (for example, operation control of the under-board movable body 32B in a win/fail button performance), the movable body LED of the movable body during the advancing operation that moves from the origin position to the performance position is in the first light emission mode (for example, seven colors (Rainbow flash mode in which various colors corresponding to the rainbow colors are emitted in sequence at predetermined intervals while turning off the light), while the movable body of the movable body during the evacuation movement moves from the production position to the origin position. The LED lights up in a second light emission mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are emitted in sequence at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the operation mode of each movable body is the same in operation confirmation control and production operation control, the movable body LED of each movable body is in the same mode (white lighting) in advance operation and retreat operation in operation confirmation control. ) (the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode are the same), but in the production operation control, the advancing motion and retreating motion are emitted in different modes (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) (first light emitting mode) and the second light emitting mode), it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can easily determine whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed. In particular, in the operation confirmation control, the emitted light color and lighting mode do not always change like the rainbow flash or smooth rainbow, making it easier to confirm the operation of the movable body.

In addition, in FIG. 56(B), a rainbow flash and a smooth rainbow are described as examples of the first light emission mode and second light emission mode of the movable body LED in performance operation control, but these light emission modes may vary according to the performance type. Different light emission modes may be used.

In addition, since the light emission brightness in the operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness in the presentation operation control, the power consumption when the power is turned on is suppressed and the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced, while the brightness of the movable LED By setting the brightness to low, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56(B), during the cold start process (during initialization notification) in the operation confirmation control, a predetermined initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over the initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound indicating that initialization notification is being executed, and is a sound different from the production sound effects output in other production operation controls. Furthermore, during hot start processing (during recovery or stopping variable display), no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (no sound).

In addition, the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 (see Figure 55 (G3)) is displayed during the valid operation period in which menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment operations are validly accepted, and the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 (see Figure 55 (G3)) By operating the selection button 132SG35 when the display 132SG480 is displayed, a predetermined menu screen (not shown) can be displayed, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be changed. ) can be adjusted.

In this embodiment, during the execution period of the operation confirmation control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), the light intensity is not controlled during the operation valid period of menu display or volume/light intensity adjustment. Even if the adjustment operation is performed, the amount of light from the various lamps 9a to 9g does not change, and light emission continues at the brightness currently being performed. More specifically, in the operation confirmation control, it is not possible to adjust the brightness of a movable body that is operating while emitting light in "white" (initial emphasis mode) with "low brightness".

In addition, during the hot start process, it may be possible to adjust the volume and light intensity during the execution period of the operation confirmation control, and by doing so, it is possible to have the player play the game in an environment that suits the player's preference as soon as possible. It becomes like this.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment cannot be performed during the execution period of operation confirmation control, but the menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed after the operation confirmation control ends. Thus, when the selection button 132SG35 is operated in the operation confirmation control, it is possible to confirm whether or not brightness adjustment has been performed as a result of the operation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot start designation command, a jackpot start opening designation command, etc. are received during the period when the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, a display layer lower than the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed. , when the display of the fanfare performance or the round performance is started and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the display of the fanfare performance or the round performance may be made visible from the middle in the lower layer. .

In addition, when a jackpot start designation command or a jackpot opening designation command is received during the display period of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed until the next command (command related to the start of the round game) is received. You may also do so.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 60, the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates in various situations, such as when the variable display has stopped and is in a game standby state, when the variable display is being executed, and when a jackpot game is being executed. Power outages may occur at certain times. Although not shown in detail, the pachinko game machine 1 may start up in cold start processing or hot start processing at any timing when a power outage occurs; The manner of movement of the body, the manner of light emission of each movable body LED, the manner of background sound, etc. may differ.

[Initial operation control at cold start and hot start]
Next, a case where the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start and a case where it is started with a hot start will be explained. Regarding the hot start, the case where the gaming state is the normal state will be explained.

Form 1 (initial operation control at cold start)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the image display device 5 starts displaying the start preparation display 132SG500 from the start timing. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed from the start of display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and the production control CPU 120 starts. Based on the reception of the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the reception timing of these power-on designation command, first game state background designation command, and customer waiting demo designation command is determined. The frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the upper frame movable body LED 9f each start emitting light in the initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R are initialized. The output of the notification sound starts.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this feature section 132SG are emitted by the production control CPU 120 when the power is turned on as light emission in the initialization notification. After the light is turned off for one second from the timing when the designation command, background image designation command, and customer waiting demonstration designation command are received, red lighting (light emission) and light extinction are repeatedly executed.

Then, two seconds (2000ms) after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5. is completed, and instead of the startup preparation display 132SG500, a background image whose variable display is stopped according to the normal state starts to be displayed. Thereafter, as initial operation control, the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-disk movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are started.

First, at a timing of 4 seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying (6 seconds (6000ms) after receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command), a chance is generated. When the advancement operation from the origin position of the button 631B to the production position is started, the chance button LED 9g starts emitting light (lighting white) in an initial emphasis mode from the start timing of the advancement operation. When the movement of the chance button 631B to the performance position is completed, the chance button 631 is stopped at the performance position for a predetermined period of time. After stopping for the predetermined period, a retracting operation of the chance button 631B from the presentation position to the origin position is executed. Note that the light emission of the chance button LED 9g in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retracting operation of the chance button 631, and returns to light emission in the initialization notification mode (see FIGS. 63(A) to 63(C)).

Further, at the end timing of the advance motion of the chance button 631B, the advance motion of the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position is started. When the advancing operation of the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position is started, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts emitting light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) from the start timing of the advancing operation. After stopping for the predetermined period, a retracting operation of the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position is executed. Note that the light emission of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retracting operation of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode.

Further, from the timing when the retracting operation of the above-board movable body 32A ends, the advancing operation of the below-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the production position is started. When the advance operation of the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the production position is started, the under-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) from the start timing of the advance operation. After stopping for the predetermined period, an evacuation operation of the under-board movable body 32B from the presentation position to the origin position is executed. Note that the light emission of the under-panel movable body LED 9e in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retracting operation of the under-panel movable body 32B, and returns to the light emission in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, during the period when the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the production position, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the production position and retreats from the production position to the origin position, and the frame-top movable body LED 9f is activated. Light emission (white lighting) is performed in an initial emphasis mode. The light emission of the frame-top movable body LED 9f in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retracting operation of the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and returns to light emission in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-panel movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 at the time of a cold start in this feature section 132SG is 20 minutes from the start of the advancement operation of the chance button 631B. The process ends when seconds (20,000ms) have elapsed. Furthermore, after the operation (confirmation operation) of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is completed, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, and the chance button are 631B, when 4 seconds (4000 ms) have elapsed from the completion timing of the operation (confirmation operation) of the frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, The light emission of the chance button LED 9g in the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are completed, and all initial operation controls are completed. In other words, the initial operation control at the cold start in the feature section 132SG is control executed over 30 seconds (30000 ms).

Here, a case will be described in which a starting prize is generated after the initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable object notice is executed based on the starting winning is started. First, as shown in FIG. 61, after initial operation control of the on-panel movable body 32A, the under-panel movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-on movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-panel movable body LED 9d, and the under-panel The movable body LED 9e and the frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (for example, white light emission). There is. Furthermore, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state where they have stopped outputting sound.

When a start winning occurs in the above state and variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L and 8R Output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started.

During the execution period of the movable body preview, an effect image (movable body effect) corresponding to the movable body preview is displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the on-board movable body 32A reciprocates between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times, and the chance button 631B continues to vibrate. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom panel movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice, and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light in response to the movable body notice. A sound (movable object warning sound) is output.

In the example shown in FIG. 61, as a movable body notice, an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable body notice is displayed on the image display device 5, and an effect image (effect display 132SG407) is displayed between the origin position and the intermediate position of the on-board movable body 32A. reciprocation, vibration of the chance button 631B, output of sound (movable body notice sound) from speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body notice, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, top panel movable body LED 9d, bottom panel movable body LED 9e, frame Although the upper movable body LED 9f emits light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice, the present invention is not limited to this. Only the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) according to the effect image and the reciprocating movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position may be executed. In addition, as the movable body notice, in addition to the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) according to the movable body notice on the image display device 5, and the reciprocating movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position. , vibration of the chance button 631B, output of sound (movable body notice sound) from speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body notice, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-panel movable body LED 9e, frame on-frame movable body One or more steps may be performed starting from the LED 9f emitting light in a manner according to the movable body notice.

Next, a case will be described in which a starting prize is generated during the initial operation control and a variable display in which a movable object notice is executed based on the starting winning is started. First, as shown in FIG. 62, when a starting prize occurs during the initial motion control of the movable body 32A on the board (more precisely, when the movable body 32A on the board remains in the production position), the starting winning occurs. Variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts from this timing. At this time, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that after the start of the variable display, the initial motion control of the on-board movable body 32A is continued, and after the initial motion control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-panel movable body 32B and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 are controlled. Initial operation control is executed.

If the execution period of the movable body notice comes during the initial motion control period of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-panel movable body 32B, the movable body effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body notice. While the image is displayed, the initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is continued (see FIGS. 63(D) to 63(E)).

Furthermore, during the operation period of each movable body, the light emission modes of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-disk movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are displayed on the image display device 5. According to the background image (background image according to the normal state) or the initial emphasis mode of each movable body, the light is not emitted in the light emission mode according to the movable body notice.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body notice in the variable display ends and the motion of all the movable bodies ends, from the timing of the end of the motion, the motion that should normally be executed during the execution period of the movable body notice The vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B are executed (FIGS. 63(F) to (J) and FIGS. 64(K) to ()). L)). While the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the top frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned on in accordance with the movable body notice. Light emission is performed, but BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a sound corresponding to the movable body notice (movable body notice sound) is output. There is no.

(Initial operation control at hot start)
As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 is started on the image display device 5 from the startup timing. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start of display of the startup preparation display 132SG500, based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 received a power failure recovery designation command, a first gaming state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, Based on the reception timing of these power failure recovery designation command, first game state background designation command, and customer waiting demo designation command, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the top movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the top frame movable body LED 9f. In each case, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state. It should be noted that no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the reception timing of the power failure recovery designation command, the first gaming state background designation command, and the customer waiting demonstration designation command (silence).

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED9d, the bottom movable body LED9e, the frame movable body LED9f, and the chance button LED9g in this feature section 132SG are emitted by the performance control CPU 120 as light emission according to the background image in the normal state. After the light is turned off for one second from the timing of receiving the power failure recovery designation command, background image designation command, and customer waiting demonstration designation command, the light is emitted in a light emission color (for example, white) corresponding to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start in a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a variable probability state (high probability high base state), the light emission is performed according to the background image of the time saving state or the probability variable state. As a result, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the under-disk movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g may be emitted with a light emission color and a light emission pattern different from those in the normal state. .

Then, two seconds (2000ms) after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5. is completed, and instead of the startup preparation display 132SG500, a background image whose variable display is stopped according to the normal state starts to be displayed. Thereafter, as initial operation control, the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-disk movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are started.

First, at a timing of 4 seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying (6 seconds (6000ms) after receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command), a chance is generated. When the advancement operation from the origin position of the button 631B to the production position is started, the chance button LED 9g starts emitting light (lighting white) in an initial emphasis mode from the start timing of the advancement operation. When the movement of the chance button 631B to the performance position is completed, the chance button 631 is stopped at the performance position for a predetermined period of time. After stopping for the predetermined period, a retracting operation of the chance button 631B from the presentation position to the origin position is executed. The light emission of the chance button LED 9g in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retracting operation of the chance button 631, and changes to the light emission in the default mode (for example, white light emission) of the chance button LED 9g.

Further, at the end timing of the advance motion of the chance button 631B, the advance motion of the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position is started. When the advancing operation of the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position is started, the on-board movable body LED 9d starts emitting light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) from the start timing of the advancing operation. After stopping for the predetermined period, a retracting operation of the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position is performed. Note that the light emission of the on-board movable body LED 9d in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retracting operation of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to light emission in a mode according to the background image in the normal state.

Further, from the timing when the retracting operation of the above-board movable body 32A ends, the advancing operation of the below-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the production position is started. When the advance operation of the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the production position is started, the under-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) from the start timing of the advance operation. After stopping for the predetermined period, an evacuation operation of the under-board movable body 32B from the presentation position to the origin position is executed. Note that the light emission of the under-panel movable body LED 9e in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the evacuation operation of the under-panel movable body 32B, and returns to the light emission in a mode according to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, during the period when the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the production position, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the production position and retreats from the production position to the origin position, and the frame-top movable body LED 9f is activated. Light emission (white lighting) is performed in an initial emphasis mode. The light emission of the frame-top movable body LED 9f in the initial emphasis mode ends at the end timing of the retracting operation of the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and returns to light emission in a mode according to the background image in the normal state.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 at the time of hot start in this feature section 132SG is for 20 seconds from the start of the advance movement of the chance button 631B. The process ends when (20000ms) has elapsed. Note that when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, unlike when started by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g. The light emission in the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the initial operation control during hot start in this feature section 132SG is performed for 26 seconds by moving the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, and the frame top The control is such that the operation (confirmation operation) of the movable body 132SG101 is executed.

Here, a case will be described in which a starting prize is generated after the initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable object notice is executed based on the starting winning is started. First, as shown in FIG. 65, after initial operation control of the on-panel movable body 32A, the under-panel movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-on movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-panel movable body LED 9d, and the under-panel The movable body LED 9e and the frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (for example, white light emission). There is. Furthermore, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state where they have stopped outputting sound (no sound).

When a starting winning occurs in the above state and variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and the speakers 8L and 8R Output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started.

During the execution period of the movable body preview, an effect image (movable body effect) corresponding to the movable body preview is displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the on-board movable body 32A reciprocates between the origin position and the intermediate position a plurality of times, and the chance button 631B continues to vibrate. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom panel movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice, and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light in response to the movable body notice. A sound (movable object warning sound) is output.

Next, a case will be described in which a starting prize is generated during the initial operation control and a variable display in which a movable object notice is executed based on the starting winning is started. First, as shown in FIG. 66, when a starting prize occurs during the initial operation control of the movable body 32A on the board (more precisely, when the movable body 32A on the board remains in the presentation position), the starting winning occurs. Variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts from this timing. At this time, the background image in the image display device 5 is switched to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and output of BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is started from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that after the start of the variable display, the initial motion control of the on-board movable body 32A is continued, and after the initial motion control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-panel movable body 32B and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 are controlled. Initial operation control is executed.

If the execution period of the movable body notice comes during the initial motion control period of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-panel movable body 32B, the movable body effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body notice. While the image is displayed, the initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is continuously executed.

Furthermore, during the operation period of each movable body, the light emission modes of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-disk movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are displayed on the image display device 5. According to the background image (background image according to the normal state) or the initial emphasis mode of each movable body, the light is not emitted in the light emission mode according to the movable body notice.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body notice in the variable display ends and the motion of all the movable bodies ends (initial motion control ends), from the timing when the movement ends, the movable body notice that would normally be The vertical movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which were to be executed during the execution period, are executed. While the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the top frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned on in accordance with the movable body notice. Light emission is performed, but BGM corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a sound corresponding to the movable body notice (movable body notice sound) is output. There is no.

As described above, in this feature section 132SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when started by a hot start, the above-board movable body 32A (and the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101) , chance button 631B) are operated as initial operation control. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a starting prize occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial motion control, and a variable display that executes a movable body notice based on the starting winning occurs. In this case, if the execution period of the movable body notice and the period of the confirmation operation overlap, the movement of the movable body 32A on the board and the movement of the movable body notice from the speakers 8L and 8R will be performed as the performance movement of the movable body notice. and the sound output. In addition, if a startup win occurs during the confirmation operation when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, and a variable display that executes a movable object notice based on the startup win is started, the performance of the movable object notice As for the operation, only the operation of the movable body 32A on the panel is regulated.

By doing this, when a movable body notice is executed in the variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable body during initial motion control, the movable body 32A on the panel is While ensuring that the initial motion control is not disturbed by the movement, the movable body effect is displayed on the image display device 5 and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, movable body on the board) indicates to the player that the movable body notice has been executed. It is possible to notify by lighting up the LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) in accordance with the movable body notice.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 66, in this feature section 132SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the electric step occurred during the execution of variable display including the execution of the movable object notice is started by hot start, and the In the above example, when the execution period of the movable body notice comes during the initial movement of each movable body, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as a movable body notice is not executed during the execution period of the movable body notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 in which the electric stage has occurred during the execution of a variable display including a deciding performance (that is, a variable display of a jackpot) is started with a hot start, and the hot start is performed. If the execution period of a decisive performance occurs during the initial movement of each movable body after the start, the movement of the under-board movable body 32B and the decisive performance of the under-board movable body LED 9e are performed as a decisive performance during the execution period of the decisive performance. Light emission (rainbow flash) may be restricted in a manner depending on the situation. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the under-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial operation or as a final performance based on the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED9e.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 30, the production control CPU 120 executes origin placement control processing at the start timing of variable display, thereby illustrating a form in which each movable body is placed at its respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a starting prize occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the starting winning is started, The initial motion of each movable body may be performed with priority over the motion of each movable body to its origin position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the initial movement of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its original position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 30, the feature section 132SG has a configuration in which each movable body is placed at its respective origin position by the performance control CPU 120 executing the origin placement control process at the start timing of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Although the present invention is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after a starting winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the starting winning starts. If the variable display ends during the initial operation period and the customer waiting demonstration performance is started in response to the end of the variable display, the customer waiting demonstration performance of each movable body is performed rather than the movement of each movable body to its origin position. It is also possible to give priority to execution of the performance action. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

(Initial motion control modification example 1)
In addition, in this feature section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body notice while the movable body is in operation as initial motion control is started. In this case, if the execution period of the movable body notice overlaps with the motion period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body notice, and the initial motion control ends. Then, check the operation of the movable body subject to the movable body notice (in the case of this feature section 132SG, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame. Although the upper movable body LED 9f and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 67, Even if a variable display that executes a movable body notice is started during the movement of a movable body as an initial motion control, if the execution period of the movable body notice is after the end of the movement of each movable body, the movable body The target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the notice.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the movable body notice, the initial operation control period (motion control of each movable body, light emission of each LED in the initialization notification mode, output of initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R) ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, The chance button LED 9g may be made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body notice, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output sound in accordance with the movable body notice.

As described above, during the initial operation control period, the operation control of each movable body has been completed, but the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g. If the movable object notice is executed while the light emission according to the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R continue, the movable object 32A on the panel corresponding to the movable object notice is executed. While the operation of the chance button 631B is executed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light according to the movable body notice mode. By not outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body notice, it is possible to prevent the production effect of the movable body notice from deteriorating.

(Initial motion control modification example 2)
In addition, in this feature section 132SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, and during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, a movable body notice indicating that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed. When variable display is started, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), display of the movable body effect on the image display device 5, frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, bottom of the board The light emission of the movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R have been explained, but as a modification example, as shown in FIG. 68, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start. , in the case where it is decided to execute the pre-read movable body notice due to variable display occurring multiple times during the confirmation operation of each movable body as initial motion control, the execution period of the pre-read movable body notice will be the same as that of each movable body. If it overlaps with the confirmation operation period or the initial operation control period, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-read movable body notice, and the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and Operation of the chance button 631B), frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-panel movable body LED 9e, frame on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g light emission in a manner according to advance notice of movable body, speakers 8L and 8R What is necessary is to prevent the sound output from being performed in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body notice. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the pre-read movable body notice is executed after the initial motion control ends, the movable body effect image on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body notice during the variable display Display, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-panel movable body LED 9e, frame on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner according to the movable body notice, from speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body notice. What is necessary is to output the sound in a certain manner.

By doing this, even if the execution period of the pre-read movable body notice comes during the confirmation operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B as the pre-read movable body notice will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by excessively operating the on-board movable body 32A or the chance button 631B after the initial operation control is completed.

(Initial motion control modification example 3)
In addition, this feature section 132SG exemplifies a form in which a movable body notice that moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and an intermediate position can be executed as an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, after the movable body notice (first movable body notice), the movable body is displayed again as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot. When the body preview (second movable body notice) is executable, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs depending on the number of times the movable body notice is executed during the variable display (for example, only the first movable body notice is executed) In the case where the second movable body notice is executed in addition to the first movable body notice, the rate of the variable table result being a jackpot is higher than when the second movable body notice is executed.

In addition, in the case where it is possible to execute a plurality of movable body notices (first movable body notice and second movable body notice) during variable display in this way, as a modification example, as shown in FIG. 69, the initial motion control When a starting prize occurs during the start winning and a variable display that gives a first movable body notice and a second movable body notice is started based on the starting prize, the execution period of the first movable body notice is the execution period of the initial motion control. If it overlaps with the first movable body notice, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice may be executed after the initial motion control is completed (the first movable body notice may be re-executed). However, if the second moving body notice has already started during the re-execution period of the first moving body notice, as shown in FIG. 69, the second moving body notice being executed is executed with priority, The first movable body notice may not be re-executed.

In this way, if the second movable body notice is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first movable body notice, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A based on the second movable body notice is given priority and is used as the first movable body notice. Also, by not executing the operation of the movable body 32A on the board, the movement of the movable body 32A on the board due to the second movable body notice is obstructed by the operation of the movable body 32A on the board due to the first movable body notice. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the production effect.

Although the example shown in FIG. 69 illustrates a form in which the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice can be executed during the variable display of 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The operation mode of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice is the same (for example, in both the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice, the on-board movable body 32A is at the origin position. and an intermediate position), or the operating modes of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice may be different (for example, the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice may be The first movable body notice is a performance in which the on-board movable body 32A moves multiple times between the origin position and an intermediate position, while the second movable body is a performance in which the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position. It is also possible to create a performance that operates multiple times.

(Initial motion control modification example 4)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69, in the case where multiple movable body notices (first movable body notice and second movable body notice) can be executed during variable display, as a modification example, as shown in FIG. , when a starting prize occurs during initial motion control and a variable display that performs a first movable body notice and a second movable body notice is started based on the starting winning, the execution period of the first movable body notice is initialized. If it overlaps with the execution period of the motion control, the operation of the movable body 32A on the panel as the first movable body notice is controlled not to be executed, while only the second movable body notice after the initial motion control is executed. It may be controlled to do so. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, when a starting prize occurs after the initial motion control and a variable display that provides a first movable body notice and a second movable body notice based on the starting prize is started, that is, the variable display When the motion of the movable body 32A on the panel is executed as the first movable body notice and the second movable body notice during display, the operation of the movable body 32A on the panel may occur due to occurrence of synchronization etc. during the execution period of the first movable body notice. If the on-board movable body 32A stops on the way, the on-board movable body 32A may be controlled to start operating as the second movable body notice during the execution period of the second movable body notice.

In this way, even if the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body notice does not end normally, the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the second movable body notice, which is the next movable body notice. By executing this, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial motion control modification example 5)
In addition, in FIG. 69, when a starting prize occurs during the initial motion control and a variable display that provides a first movable body notice and a second movable body notice based on the starting winning is started, the first movable body notice If the execution period overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice can be executed after the initial motion control ends, while the first movable body Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which, when the re-execution period of the body notice is within the execution period of the second movable body notice, the execution of the second movable body notice is prioritized and the first movable body notice is not re-executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in FIG. The re-execution of the first movable body notice may be interrupted at the start timing of the execution period, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as a second movable body notice.

In this way, when the execution period of the second movable body notice comes while the on-board movable body 32A is operating as the first movable body notice, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body notice is changed. By interrupting the operation and starting the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the second movable body notice, the movable body on the board as the second movable body notice is caused by the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as the first movable body notice. It is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the obstruction of the operation of 32A.

(Initial motion control modification example 6)
In addition, in the characteristic section 132SG, while the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the production position as an initial operation control, the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and an intermediate position as a production operation of the movable body notice. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the movable body 32A on the board is moved between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial motion control and the motion motion of the movable body notice. It may also be operated in

In addition, regarding the case where the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the production position in both the initial operation control and the production operation of the movable body notice, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation, While the on-board movable body 32A continues to execute the initial operation until it is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as a performance motion of the movable body notice, , the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped according to process data for movable body advance notice, regardless of whether or not the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the production position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B) as a modified example, when operating the on-board movable body 32A as initial operation control, the production control CPU 120 uses the origin position sensor to move the on-board movable body 32A. Based on the fact that the movable body 32A is detected, the drive motor 132SG122 is driven in normal rotation to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a first period (1000 ms). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops normal rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the performance position). let Then, based on the fact that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124, the drive motor 132SG122 is driven in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Further, the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped on condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73(B), for example, a loss of synchronization occurs during the movement of the on-board movable body 32A toward the production position, causing the on-board movable body 32A to change between the origin position and the production position. In the case where the performance control CPU 120 stops in between, the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance position sensor 132SG124 to continue driving the drive motor 132SG122 in normal rotation beyond the first period because the performance position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period after starting the initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A. It is determined that there is an error in the operation of the body 32A, and the drive motor 132SG122 is driven in reverse from the determination timing of the operation error, thereby operating the movable body 32A on the board toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms. Then, based on the fact that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the driving of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 74(A) and 74(B), when operating the on-board movable body 32A as a performance operation of a movable body notice, the performance control CPU 120 operates based on the process data of the movable body notice. By driving the drive motor 132SG122 in normal rotation, the board movable body 32A is moved toward the performance position during a second period that is longer than the first period. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the performance position by stopping normal rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body notice. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124. Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A to the origin position by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in reverse based on the process data of the movable body notice while the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position. Operate towards it. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body notice. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74(B), for example, a step-out or the like occurs during the movement of the on-board movable body 32A toward the production position, causing the on-board movable body 32A to change between the origin position and the production position. In the case of stopping during the period, the performance control CPU 120 continues to drive the drive motor 132SG122 in normal rotation based on the process data of the movable body notice until the second period elapses. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 controls the drive motor 132SG122 to be adjusted based on the process data of the movable body notice, regardless of whether or not the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 at the end timing of the second period. Stop the rolling drive.

Then, if the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 for a predetermined period (a period longer than the second period after starting the initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 detects the on-board movable body 32A is determined to be an operation error, and the drive motor 132SG122 is driven in reverse from the determination timing of the operation error to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms. Then, based on the fact that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the driving of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, if a movable object notice is executed during a game discussion after the initial motion control is completed, the initial motion control will be executed even if the movement of the movable body 32A on the board corresponding to the movable body notice is not performed normally. Since the operation of the movable body 32A on the board as a (confirmation operation) is not executed, it is possible to reduce the deterioration in the performance effect of the movable body notice that is not performed normally.

(Initial motion control modification example 7)
In addition, in the sixth modification, when the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 as an initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error of the on-board movable body 32A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation control, the on-board movable body 32A is 32A is not operated, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-disk movable body LED 9e, frame on-movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R may output only the sound in response to the movable body notice from 8R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75 as modification example 7, the effect control CPU 120 can operate the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the effect position for 1000 ms as initial operation control. , it is assumed that the on-board movable body 32A can be moved from the presentation position to the origin position for 2000 ms.

Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as the initial motion control, the performance control CPU 120 performs the initial motion control multiple times after determining that an operation error has occurred. Assume that it is executable.

Here, if the performance control CPU 120 executes the initial motion control four times and determines an error in all of them, the performance control CPU 120 stores the on-board movable body 32A as a motion limited movable body by the fourth initial motion control (dead). end judgment). Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 operates the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the performance position for 3000 ms as special initial operation control, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A back to the origin position for 6000 ms. operate towards.

Thereafter, when a starting prize occurs and a variable display that executes a movable object notice based on the starting winning starts, the performance control CPU 120 stores the on-board movable object 32A as a movement-restricted movable object. Based on this, during the movable body notice execution period, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated, and the effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, and below-board movable body It is only necessary to turn on the LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) and output the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the movable body notice.

As described above, while the on-board movable body 32A determined as a dead end is not operated as a movable body notice, the effect display on the image display device 5, the LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body By operating the movable body 32A on the board as a movable body notice by lighting the body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the movable body notice. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the presentation effect of the movable body notice while preventing breakdowns from occurring.

Note that the configurations described in the above-mentioned Modifications 1 to 7 may be added to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Alternatively, a part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may be changed to the configuration of at least one of the modifications 1 to 7. In other words, any one of the above-described modifications 1 to 7 or a combination of the plurality of modifications can be added to or changed to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

Form 2 (Initial motion control modification example 8)
In addition, in the feature section 132SG, as shown in FIG. Although the form in which the demonstration effect is executed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 8, as shown in FIGS. 76, 77, and 78, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is If the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low base state (normal state), or if the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a high base state (time saving state), the pachinko game will not start. While the performance control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the activation of the machine 1, the customer waiting demonstration performance itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation ends.

By doing so, the image of the customer waiting demonstration performance (the demo shown in FIGS. 76, 77, and 78) is displayed on the image display device 5 by the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) that operates as the initial operation control. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the image of the customer waiting demonstration performance from decreasing due to the interruption of the video (movie).

Although FIGS. 76, 77, and 78 illustrate the form in which the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The period until the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed after the initial movement is completed is after 30 seconds, which is the period required for the initial movement of each movable body, has elapsed, so that the initial movement of each movable body and the customer waiting demonstration performance can be performed. A sufficient period may be provided between the two to prevent the visibility of the customer waiting demonstration performance from being obstructed.

Furthermore, the period from when the initial motion of each movable body ends until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed is made different depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start or when it is started with a hot start. Good too. It should be noted that the period from when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start and when it starts up with a hot start until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed after the initial movement of each movable body is different. However, by ensuring that the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed after the initial movement of each movable object is completed, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting demonstration effect from being interrupted by the movable object that operates as the initial movement. good.

(Initial motion control modification example 9)
In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, as shown in FIG. 75, when the performance control CPU 120 determines the dead end of the on-board movable body 32A, while not operating the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body notice, Display of effects on the image display device 5, lighting of LEDs (frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and movable body notice from speakers 8L and 8R. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as shown in FIG. If the determination is made, when the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed after the end of the special initial operation, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated, and an effect corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed on the image display device 5. , LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-disk movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be lit in accordance with the customer waiting demonstration performance.

By doing this, in a situation where the movable body 32A on the panel does not operate normally, it is possible to prevent the movable body 32A on the panel from causing a malfunction due to forceful movement of the movable body 32A while waiting for a customer. It becomes possible to promote a reduction in the performance effect of the performance.

Form 3 (power outage just before the jackpot fluctuation ends)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the jackpot fluctuation will be explained based on FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the jackpot fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 80, after the variable display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern is started, the combination of jackpot confirmed symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, the jackpot After a fixed symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display is restarted and a re-lottery effect is being executed, or after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the decorative symbol is displayed in the next variable display. After a power outage occurs approximately 5000 ms before the end of variable display, such as the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period until the start of ), the variable jackpot display is restarted, but the variable display ends immediately and control of the jackpot game state is started.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure recovery designation command and symbol confirmation command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103, the jackpot start designation command is issued. The fanfare performance is started based on the reception by the performance control CPU 120.

Specifically, until a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1000ms) has elapsed after receiving the power failure recovery designation command and symbol confirmation command, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the under-disk movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable LED The light emission of the body LED 9f and chance button LED 9g and the output of background sound (BGM) are restricted. That is, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-disk movable body LED 9e, the frame on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and the background sound (BGM) is not output.

After that, when the jackpot start designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are set in a mode corresponding to the fanfare production (introduction part). At the same time as the light is emitted, the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part) starts. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has elapsed after receiving the jackpot start designation command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) starts. . Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) is displayed as a black screen until a predetermined time (for example, 1500 ms) has elapsed from the start.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. Thereafter, after the initial motion of each movable body ends, the fanfare performance (introduction part) ends, and the fanfare performance (right-handed notification part) starts.

In the right-hand hitting notification part in the fanfare performance, as shown in FIGS. 52 (F7) and (F8), right-hand hitting promotion displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to encourage the player to launch the game ball into the right playing area. Since the hitting operation promotion effect is performed, if the initial movement of the movable body is being executed when the right-hand hitting notification part starts, the movable body that operates according to the initial movement will perform the fanfare performance such as the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG431. The visibility of the right-handed hitting notification part is obstructed, and there is a possibility that the player may suffer a disadvantage without performing a right-handed hitting operation.

In addition, in the right-handed notification part in the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 52 (F7), when the right-handed promotion display 132SG431 is displayed, the movable body 32A on the board descends from the origin position to the production position. is executed, so if the initial motion of the movable body is being performed when the right-handed hitting notification part starts, it is difficult to determine whether the movable body is performing the initial motion or the right-handed operation promotion effect. Become.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare performance, a fanfare performance (right-hand hit notification Since the movable body is controlled so that the initial motion ends before the beginning of the initial motion, the movable body that performs the initial motion may obstruct the visibility of the right-handed notification part in the fanfare production, or may cause the initial motion to end. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to determine which of the right-handed operation promotion effects is being operated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare performance, the period from the start of the fanfare performance until the start of the right-handed hitting promotion performance (FIG. 52 (F1) to (F6) )) The introduction part period and the initial movement period of the fanfare performance are set so that the initial movement of the movable body ends within the period shown in ).

In addition, in the introduction part of the fanfare performance, when notifying which of the multiple types of jackpots A to E, the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type to be controlled and the corresponding jackpot type display 132SG421 are displayed. It is possible to display the introduction display 132SG422 before the jackpot type display is displayed, and in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation can be performed before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed in FIG. 52 (F6). By completing this, even if the operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare performance, it becomes possible to grasp which type of jackpot will be controlled.

In addition, when the fanfare effect is executed, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e under the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g, which are in initial operation, emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and The movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body under the board LED 9e, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that is not operating in the operation confirmation control are illuminated in a lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part) (for example, 3R jackpot) The light is emitted in a blue-based color, the 10R jackpot is emitted in a red-based color, etc.), but the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part). Therefore, even during the fanfare performance, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, when the first movable body is moving due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body produces a fanfare effect. By emitting light in a light emission mode corresponding to (introduction part), it is possible to indicate that the movable body is in the initial operation even during a fanfare performance.

In addition, when a fanfare performance is executed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance at the first brightness, while during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, The lower panel movable body LED 9e and the frame upper movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness) to reduce power consumption and load when the power is turned on. is possible.

In addition, from the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to undergo initial motion is placed at the home position), the duty ratio of all movable body LEDs may be lowered or The duty ratio may be reduced until the time expires.

Further, when the first movable body is operating due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in an initial emphasis mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial emphasis mode. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating through the operation confirmation control.

In addition, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation has a common initial emphasis mode (white lighting) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the production position and when it retreats from the production position to the origin position. ), while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the production operation control emits different light when the movable body advances from the origin position to the production position and when it retreats from the production position to the origin position. It is possible to emit light in different ways. Specifically, during the advance operation, the movable body LED is moved in the first mode (for example, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the attacker LED 9c, the movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, etc.) at a predetermined period from one side to the other side. When retracting, the movable LED may emit light in a second mode (for example, a flash mode that blinks at a fast cycle (30 ms, etc.)). By doing so, it is possible to easily determine whether operation confirmation control or production operation control is being performed based on the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) and the mode corresponding to the production.

In addition, in the movable body performance executed in the right-handed notification part of the fanfare performance, the movable body 32A on the board operates in the same operation mode as the initial movement (lowering from the origin position to the performance position); The body LED emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lights), and in the movable body performance, it emits light in a mode different from the initial emphasis mode (white lights) and corresponds to the right-handed hitting notification part, and moves in the initial motion. The sound output is limited when the body moves, and in the movable body performance executed in the right-handed hitting notification part, the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting notification part is output. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine whether operation confirmation control or production operation control is being performed, based on the initial emphasis mode and the mode corresponding to the right-handed hitting notification part.

In addition, in this embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the operation mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance executed in the right-handed notification part and the operation mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation are common. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only some aspects are common between the operation mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance and the operation mode of the on-board movable body 32A during the initial operation. It may also be possible for all operating modes to be the same. Furthermore, the operating modes of both may be completely different.

In addition, when performing a movable body performance in the right-handed notification part of a fanfare performance, it is possible to move the movable body using a special action and display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance, and the operation confirmation control can be performed at a specific period. If the operation cannot be completed normally for a long period of time, it is determined that it is an operation error and the movement confirmation control can be performed again.If the operation confirmation control is performed for a specific period, the moving object performance is When executed, the special operation may be restricted while the effect display may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the initial action from being disturbed by the special action, and to indicate to the player that the movable body effect has been executed by displaying the effect.

Form 4 (Power outage immediately after the fanfare performance starts)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance will be described based on FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare performance.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the variable display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern, after the jackpot confirmed symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the variable display ends, the symbol confirmed display period ends. The fanfare performance of the jackpot is started based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command by the performance control CPU 120. Immediately after the fanfare performance starts, a power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and the jackpot game state Control is resumed.

Immediately after the fanfare performance is started, specifically, it is immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the jackpot, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start designation command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103, starts the fanfare performance. Immediately after starting the (introduction part), after starting with hot start, only the power failure recovery designation command is sent as the CPU 103 recovers, so the performance control CPU 120 receives the command to designate the opening of the grand prize opening. Until then, it is not possible to specify what the gaming state is (such as whether it is a fanfare period or not). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the corresponding state (for example, turned off) during restoration, and the background sound (BGM) is restored. (for example, silence). In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. The restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power is being restored from the power outage until the next command is received, that is, during the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control is started during the remaining period of the fanfare during which it is announced that the power is being restored, and the operation confirmation control is ended before the fanfare period ends and the round game starts. It has become. In the operation confirmation control, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the frame on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) while the initial operation is being performed, but the performance operation control It emits light at a lower brightness than when it emits light.

After that, when receiving the large winning hole open designation command that specifies that the large winning hole is open for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the first time has started, so the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, The board movable body LED9d, the board bottom movable body LED9e, and the frame movable body LED9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the jackpot song that is output during the jackpot, and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot song is output. will be started. Incidentally, the chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner that indicates that one of a plurality of jackpot songs can be selected.

In this way, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance is started, the initial operation will be performed in the operation confirmation control that is started during the remaining period of the fanfare. The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e under the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance) Since the light is emitted at a lower brightness than when it is emitted in the machine, the power consumption when the power is turned on is suppressed and the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

In addition, based on receiving a command indicating that the big winning hole is open and indicating that the big winning hole is open, a production corresponding to the round game (light emission and sound output corresponding to the song during the jackpot) is started. In detail, during the round game period, the big prize opening is open for a long time and a large number of game balls can be won, and it is more advantageous for players than the fanfare period and ending period for the jackpot, so images, lamps, and sounds are This provides a lively round performance, but since the operation confirmation control ends before the round performance corresponding to this round game starts, the player can enjoy the round performance without worrying about the movable body that initially moves. You will be able to do this.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare performance is started, the period until the fanfare performance ends (FIG. 52 The fanfare presentation period and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within (see (F2) to (F6)).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can handle two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time as the fanfare performance is executed and then the power is turned on. The image display device 5 displays the restoration indication 132SG510, and displays the operating on-panel movable body LED 9d, under-panel movable body LED 9e, and frame top movable body LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the restoration status indication 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis aspect). It is possible to perform lighting control during recovery to emit light (white light), and if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, or at the same time as the fanfare performance is executed. After that, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control when the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-panel movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are excluded from the movable bodies that are in initial operation during power recovery. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Good too.

In addition, the image display device 5 may be affected by a power outage during variable display and then the power is turned on, or a power outage at the same time as the fanfare performance is being performed and then the power is turned on. Although the common recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, for example, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the low base state and then the power is turned on, when the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, The right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is not displayed, but if a power outage occurs at the same time as the fanfare performance and the power is turned on afterwards, the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 will be displayed while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed. Although there are differences in the display, as long as at least the display mode of the restoration display 132SG510 is the same, the display modes of the other displays do not need to be the same.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the high base state or during a jackpot, and then the power is turned on, the right hit promotion display 132SG430 will be displayed at the same timing as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the gaming state, when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs, only the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, and depending on the gaming state, it is determined whether to display the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430. You don't have to. Furthermore, when the restoration display 132SG510 experiences a power outage during variable display in a low base state, and then is powered on, a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state, or during a jackpot. Thereafter, the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 may be different depending on when the power is turned on. In this case, if a power outage occurs during a variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot, and then the power is turned on, it is preferable that the display mode promotes a right-handed operation.

In addition, when a power outage occurs during a fanfare performance and the power is turned on afterwards, the performance control CPU 120 displays a recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and displays the board of the movable body that is in initial operation. It is possible to make the upper movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the frame upper movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and a power outage occurs at the same time as the fanfare performance is executed, and then , when the power is turned on, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of movable bodies that are not initially operating are being restored over the execution period of the fanfare production. It is possible to cause the light to emit light in a mode corresponding to the display (in this embodiment, the light is turned off), and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the recovery display. In this way, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body being operated by the operation confirmation control.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 causes the on-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable bodies that are initially operating to emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting). , During fanfare performance (performance operation control), the movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the bottom movable body, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button 631B are controlled to emit light at a lower brightness than the mode corresponding to the song during the jackpot. By doing so (see FIG. 56(B)), it is possible to suppress power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (lights off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare production (big hit song), so even if the fanfare production is in progress before the power outage, the power supply It is possible to notify that restoration is in progress at the time of input.

In addition, the operation mode of each movable body under operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body under production operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the production position) are common, and the movable body on the board of the movable body During operation confirmation control, the LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed, and the performance operation control (for example, the right/fail button) In the first period (for example, advance operation period), the light is emitted in a rainbow flash mode, and in the second period (for example, the retreat operation period), the light is emitted in a smooth rainbow mode that is different from the rainbow flash mode. . By doing so, it becomes possible to easily determine whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed.

Form 5 (Power outage just before the end of the fanfare performance)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance will be explained based on FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance. FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare performance. In FIG. 84, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 82, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the jackpot fanfare performance that was started based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (when the power is restored) When the hot start process is executed (when the power is turned on), control of the jackpot game state is restarted.

In detail, the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare performance means the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare performance (right-handed notification part) started by the performance control CPU 120 based on receiving the jackpot start designation command, that is, the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare performance (right-handed notification part), that is, when the CPU 103 detects the jackpot. This includes the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare period (for example, the timing approximately 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period), which waits from the start of control to the start of control of the round game.

In this case, based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command sent with the recovery of the CPU 103 and the grand prize opening opening designation command corresponding to the first time after being activated by hot start, Over the round game period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the song during jackpot, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner corresponding to the opening. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner that suggests song selection, and background sound (BGM) is output in a manner that corresponds to the song during the jackpot.

In addition, if there is a remaining time of the fanfare period (for example, about 1000 ms) when the hot start is started, after receiving the power failure recovery designation command based on the recovery of the CPU 103, the remaining time of 1000 ms is After the elapse of time, a command corresponding to the opening of the grand prize opening will be received, but in the remaining time of the fanfare period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame The upper movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are turned off, and the background sound (BGM) is not output. Note that the movable LED may emit light in a corresponding manner during restoration.

In addition, after the operation check control of each movable body starts with the start of the first game, the operation check is performed before the opening control of the big prize opening in the first game ends and the next round game starts. Control is now terminated. In the operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-panel movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) while the initial operation is being performed. It is designed to emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during production operation control.

After that, in the first round, after receiving a command after the opening of the grand prize opening that specifies after the opening of the grand prize opening, in the second round, a command for specifying the opening of the grand prize opening that specifies when the grand prize opening is open is sent for production control. When the CPU 120 receives it, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f emit light in an open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time, and then the jackpot music that is output during the jackpot is output. In addition to emitting light in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the song during the jackpot is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner that indicates that one of the plurality of jackpot songs can be selected, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a corresponding manner during the jackpot.

In this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance, the initial operating movable body board is The upper movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but because they emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during production operation control, the power supply While reducing the power consumption at the time of input and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable body LED provided on the movable body is set to a lower brightness than when executing performance operation control, thereby reducing dazzling and movable body LEDs. This prevents the operation from becoming difficult to confirm.

In addition, it is possible to end the operation confirmation control when the power is cut off and turned on immediately before the end of the fanfare performance before the opening control of the big prize opening in the first round game ends. Even after the initial action is completed, it becomes possible to aim for a prize in the big prize opening without being obstructed by the movable body.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance, the opening control of the big prize opening in the first game ends. The opening control period of the big prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period (see FIG. 52 (F8) to (F9)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(A), in a round game in which the grand prize opening is controlled to be open for a specified period after the fanfare performance has ended, the display screen of the image display device 5 shows the round In addition to displaying images for presentation, a right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 indicating the direction in which the game ball is launched is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the number of rounds as a round game related display on the upper side of the display screen. Display 132SG451, number of winning pitches display 132SG452, number of balls played 132SG453, and number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454 are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32a can move vertically in the diagonal area E1 surrounded by the two-dot chain line. The support portion 32b is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Further, when the underboard movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32c and the support section 32d are movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where only the support portion 32b can overlap, and the number of rounds display 132SG451 and the number of consecutive hits/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 are displayed in a position where the production portion 32a and the support portion 32b partially overlap. The winning pitch number display 132SG452 and the outgoing pitch number display 132SG453 are displayed at a position where the production section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform an initial operation will be explained based on FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B).

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A displays a right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, a round number display 132SG451, a winning pitch number display 132SG452, an outgoing pitch number display 132SG453, and a continuous ball display 132SG453. Since it does not overlap with any of the number of hits/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, the player can visually recognize all of the displays (see FIG. 83(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the front side of the round number display 132SG451, the winning pitch number display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, and the number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454. Since the effect section 32a overlaps with the above, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize these displays. Furthermore, since the support portion 32b overlaps with the front side of the right-handed playing promotion display 132SG430, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the right-handed playing promotion display 132SG430 (see FIG. 83(B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the production position, the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but a part of the number of consecutive hits/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 is displayed on the front side. Due to the overlap of the parts 32a, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the number of consecutive hits/total number of pitches played 132SG454, but the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning pitches display 132SG452, and the number of balls played display 132SG454. Since the pitch count display 132SG453 does not overlap with either the production section 32a or the support section 32b, the player can visually recognize these displays (see FIG. 83(C)).

In addition, when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same, but the on-board movable body 32A moves from the origin position to the production position. Since the moving speed of the retracting operation in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the overlap time is longer during the retracting operation than during the advancing operation. As the length increases, the time during which it is difficult for the player to see the screen also increases.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), when an initial movement is performed in a round game, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap with the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult for the player to see (or not see). ), the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot (for example, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning pitches display 132SG452, number of balls played 132SG453, number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.). Therefore, the visibility of the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, which has a high degree of influence on the game, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B which initially operate.

In other words, in a round game where the big winning opening is opened and it is advantageous for the player, if the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430 is covered by the above-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B which are initially operated, the big winning opening is opened. During the open state, the player may miss the opportunity to win the game ball by right-handed operation, and the player may be disadvantaged, so the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is different from other jackpot information displays. It is preferable that visibility is maintained.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84(B), when the underboard movable body 32B is located at the origin position, the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, and the number of balls out display 132SG453 , the number of consecutive hits/total number of pitched balls display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 83(A)).

Next, while the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and ascends to the production position, and even after reaching the production position, the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, the number of rounds display 132SG451, and the winning ball are displayed. Since it does not overlap with any of the number display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, and the number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454, the player can see all of the displays (see FIGS. 83(D) and (E)). . Incidentally, even when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 84(A), when an initial movement is performed in a round game, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see it. The time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls played 132SG453, the number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) Since it is shorter than , the visibility of the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, which has a high influence on the game, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B which initially operate.

In addition, regarding the under-board movable body 32B, during the period when the initial operation is being performed, the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls released 132SG453, the continuous It is visible to the player because it does not overlap with any of the numbers displayed (number of shots played/total number of pitched balls displayed 132SG454, etc.).

In other words, in a round game where the big winning opening is opened and it is advantageous for the player, if the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430 is covered by the above-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B which are initially operated, the big winning opening is opened. During the open state, the player may miss the opportunity to win a game ball by performing a right-handed operation, and the player may be disadvantaged. However, in this embodiment, the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is Compared to the jackpot information display, the time during which visibility becomes difficult due to the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B which are initially operated is shorter, so that it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is initially operating emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not initially operating is displayed during the jackpot song (round effect). Although it emits light in the corresponding mode, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the jackpot song (round effect), so pay attention to the movable body that initializes even during the round game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is in initial operation emits light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not in initial operation is lit during the jackpot song ( However, when the first movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in a mode corresponding to the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), By causing the movable body LED of the second movable body to emit light in a manner corresponding to the song (round performance) during the jackpot, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body that performs the initial operation even during the round game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a round game when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance, the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in initial operation is The luminous brightness when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the jackpot song (round effect) is the same as the brightness for a round when the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not start up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare effect. In the game, an example has been given in which the light emitting brightness is the same as that when the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the song (round performance) during a jackpot, but the present invention is limited to this. In a round game when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance, the movable body LED of the movable body that is not in initial operation is a jackpot. The luminous brightness when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the music (round performance) is the same as that in a round game when the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not start up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance. The luminance may be lower than the luminance when the movable body LED of the movable body that is not initially operating emits light in a manner corresponding to the jackpot song (round performance). By doing so, it is possible to suppress power consumption when the power is turned on and to reduce the load.

Form 6 (Power outage immediately after the start of the first round game)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of one round game will be explained based on FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of one round game.

As shown in FIG. 85, after the jackpot fanfare effect is finished, the round effect is started based on the reception of the jackpot open designation command indicating that the first round game (first round) has started. Immediately after a power outage occurs, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is restarted.

Immediately after the round performance is started, specifically, the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the big prize opening designation command indicating that the first round game has started. In other words, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the first round game (for example, the timing immediately after starting the opening control of the big prize opening in the round game (for example, after about 1000 ms)) including.

In this case, after the hot start, only the power failure recovery designation command is sent as the CPU 103 recovers. It is not possible to specify whether the game is in a certain state (such as whether it is a round game period or not). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the corresponding state (for example, turned off) during restoration, and the background sound (BGM) is restored. (for example, silence). In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. The recovery display 132SG510 is displayed (see Figure 97), and the power is being restored until the next command, which is the command specified after opening the first big prize opening, is received, that is, until the first round gaming period ends. It is reported that this is the case.

In addition, the operation confirmation control is started during the first round gaming period during which it is reported that the power is being restored, and ends before the first round gaming period ends. There is. In the operation confirmation control, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-panel movable body LED 9e, the frame on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) while the initial operation is being performed, but the performance operation control It emits light at a lower brightness than when it emits light.

After that, after receiving the command after opening the big winning hole that specifies that the period when the big winning hole changed from the open state to the closed state, it is determined that it is the period when the big winning hole changed from the closed state to the open state. When receiving the specified big prize opening specifying command, the performance control CPU 120 can specify that the first round game has ended and the second round game has started, so the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, The board movable body LED9d, the board bottom movable body LED9e, and the frame movable body LED9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the jackpot song that is output during the jackpot, and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot song is output. Begins. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner that indicates that one of the plurality of jackpot songs can be selected, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a corresponding manner during the jackpot.

In this way, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round performance, the initial operation will be performed in the operation confirmation control that is started during the round game period. The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e under the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance) Since the light is emitted at a lower brightness than when it is emitted in the machine, the power consumption when the power is turned on is suppressed and the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the case where the power is cut off and the power is turned on immediately after the opening control of the big winning opening in the first round game is started, the opening control of the big winning opening in the first round game ends. Since it is possible to end the game before the initial operation is completed, it is possible to aim for a prize in the big prize opening without being obstructed by the movable body even after the initial operation is completed.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the big prize opening in the first round game is started, the corresponding The opening control of the big winning opening in the first round game is performed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control of the big winning opening in the first round game ends (see FIG. 52 (F9)). A period and an initial operation period are set.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 may have a power outage during a variable display and then be turned on, or a power outage may occur at the same time as the grand prize opening is controlled to be open, and then the power may be turned on. In this case, the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operating panel movable body LED 9d, panel bottom movable body LED 9e, and frame top movable body LED 9f are displayed in a manner corresponding to the restoration status display 132SG510. (For example, initial emphasis mode; white lighting) It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light in the initial highlighting mode; when a power outage occurs during variable display, and then the power is turned on, and when the grand prize opening is open. It is possible to perform operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the control is performed, and then the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-panel movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are excluded from the movable bodies that are in initial operation during power recovery. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Good too.

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the grand prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is turned on thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and displays the initial It is possible to light up the moving body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e on the bottom movable body, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the chance button 631B in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) of the movable body that is operating, and the big prize opening is opened. If a power outage occurs at the same time as the state is controlled, and then the power is turned on, the large prize opening will be in the open state for the duration of the control, and the movable body on the board that is not initially operating. It is possible to cause the LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B to emit light in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (unlit in this embodiment), and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is It is not used in the mode corresponding to the display during recovery (lights off). In this way, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body being operated by the operation confirmation control.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the recovery display (lights off) is not used in the light emission mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round performance (big hit song), so even if the power is off during the round performance before the power outage, the power is turned off. It is possible to notify that restoration is in progress at the time of input.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 6, if a power outage occurs immediately after the second round game (2R to 10R) is started, the control of the first round game (opening of the big prize opening) described above will not be started. Since the operation is the same as when a power outage occurs immediately after a power failure occurs, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Form 7 (Power outage just before the end of the first round game)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round game will be explained based on FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round game.

As shown in FIG. 86, a power outage occurred just before the round performance that was started based on the reception of the big prize opening command indicating that the first round game (first round) had started ended. After that, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the control of the jackpot game state is restarted.

In detail, immediately before the round performance ends, the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on the reception of the big prize opening designation command indicating that the first round game has started ends. The timing immediately before, that is, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 finishes controlling the first round game (for example, the timing immediately before the opening control of the big prize opening in the first round game ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), , the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the big winning hole, the round interval period in the first round game, etc.).

In this case, after being activated by hot start, the power failure recovery designation command and the designation command after the first big prize opening are received as the CPU 103 recovers, so that the production control CPU 120 is activated during the first round interval period. Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in the corresponding mode (for example, turned off) during recovery, and the background sound ( BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during recovery. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. The restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see Figure 97), and the power is being restored until the next command, the second big prize opening designation command, is received, that is, until the first round interval period ends. It is reported that this is the case.

After that, when the second big prize opening designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, and the upper frame movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the song during the jackpot (round performance), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the song during the jackpot is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner that indicates that one of the plurality of jackpot songs can be selected, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a corresponding manner during the jackpot.

In addition, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the first round game, operation confirmation control will be started during the second round game period, and the operation confirmation control will start during the second round game period. The operation confirmation control is configured to end before the round game period ends. Note that the operation confirmation control may be started during the round interval period in the first round game. In addition, during operation confirmation control, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) while the initial operation is in progress. The light is emitted at a lower brightness than when it is emitted during operation control.

In this way, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the first round game, the operation will be checked during the second round game following the relevant round game. Control is started, and the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body below the panel LED 9e, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the performance operation control ( The movable body LED provided on the movable body emits light at a lower brightness than when it emits light during the movable body performance in the win/fail button performance, reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1. By setting the brightness to be lower than when executing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the first round game, the big prize opening in the second round game will be closed. The opening control period and the initial operation period of the big winning opening are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control ends (see FIG. 52 (F10)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 7, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the second round game (2R to 10R), immediately after the control of the first round game (opening of the big prize opening) is started. Since the operation is the same as when a power outage occurs, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Form 8 (Power outage immediately after the start of the special interval)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the special interval will be described based on FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the special interval.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the jackpot opening in all round games ends is 0.5 seconds, whereas the jackpot type is In the case of jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the jackpot in the third round game ends is 30 seconds (see Figure 8), and during this special round interval period, A promotion effect (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in FIG. 87, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the third round performance of jackpots C to E, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (when the power is restored (when the power is turned on) When the start process is executed, control of the jackpot game state is restarted.

Immediately before the end of the third round of jackpots C to E, specifically, the CPU 120 for controlling the jackpot based on the reception of the jackpot open designation command indicating that the third round game has started. The timing immediately before the round production started by ends, that is, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends the opening control of the big winning opening in the third round game (for example, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends the opening control of the big winning opening in the third round game) This includes the timing immediately before the end (for example, about 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the big winning hole, etc.

In this case, after being started with a hot start, the power failure recovery designation command and the command after the third big prize opening are received as the CPU 103 recovers, and the performance control CPU 120 starts the third special round interval. period, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in the corresponding mode (for example, turned off) during the recovery, and the background sound will be (BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during recovery. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. The restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see Figure 97), and the power is restored until the next command, the second big prize opening designation command, is received, that is, until the third special round interval period ends. You will be notified that it is inside.

After that, when the fourth big prize opening designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the song during the jackpot (round performance), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the song during the jackpot is started. The chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner that indicates that one of the plurality of jackpot songs can be selected, and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a corresponding manner during the jackpot.

In addition, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the opening control of the big prize opening in the third round game ends, operation confirmation control will be performed during the third special round interval period. is started, and the operation confirmation control is completed before the third special round interval period ends. In addition, during operation confirmation control, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) while the initial operation is in progress. The light is emitted at a lower brightness than when it is emitted during operation control.

In this way, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the opening control of the big prize opening in the third round game ends, during the third special round interval period. Operation confirmation control is started, and the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the LED 9e on the bottom movable body, the LED 9f on the frame movable body, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting). Since the light is emitted at a lower brightness than when it is emitted during operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance), the power consumption when the power is turned on is suppressed, reducing the load on the pachinko game machine 1, and the light emitted from the movable body. By setting the movable body LED to a lower brightness than when performing performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the opening control of the big prize opening in the third round game ends, The opening control of the grand prize opening and the round interval period and the initial movement period are performed so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within the period until the end of the special round interval period (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)). is set.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 8, although the form in which the special round interval is set after the opening control of the big prize opening in the third round game is completed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third round game The special round interval may be set after the opening control of the big prize opening in other round games is completed.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 may have a power outage during a variable display and then turn on the power, or a power outage at the same time as the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, and then the power may not be turned on. In this case, the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operating panel movable body LED 9d, panel bottom movable body LED 9e, and frame top movable body LED 9f are displayed in a manner corresponding to the restoration status display 132SG510. (For example, initial emphasis mode: white lighting) It is possible to perform light emission control during recovery to emit light in the initial highlighting mode; when a power outage occurs during variable display, and then the power is turned on, and when the grand prize opening is closed. It is possible to perform operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the control is performed, and then the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In addition, when a power outage occurs at the same time as the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, and the power is turned on thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and displays the initial It is possible to light up the movable body on the board LED9d, the movable body under the board LED9e, the movable body on the frame LED9f, and the chance button 631B in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) of the movable body that is in operation, and the grand prize opening is closed. If a power outage occurs at the same time that the power is turned on and the power is turned on afterwards, the big prize opening will be in the closed state for the duration of the control, and the movable body on the board that is not in initial operation will be in the closed state. It is possible to cause the LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B to emit light in a mode corresponding to the recovery display (unlit in this embodiment), and the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is It is not used in the mode corresponding to the display during recovery (lights off). In this way, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body being operated by the operation confirmation control.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the panel bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are excluded from the movable bodies that are in initial operation during power recovery. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Good too.

In addition, when a power outage occurs at the same time as the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, and the power is turned on thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and displays the In the round game, when the big prize opening is controlled to be closed, the interval performance can be executed, and in the interval performance, the movable body on the board LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance The button 631B and the attacker LED 9c can be emitted in a manner corresponding to the song during the jackpot (interval performance), and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body under the board LED 9e, and the movable body on the frame LED 9f of the movable body that is in initial operation. , it is possible to cause the chance button 631B to emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting). Then, in the third round game, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the big prize opening is controlled to be closed (special round interval), and then the power is turned on, the third special round interval control is executed. For a period of time, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, the movable body LED 9e under the panel, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c of the movable bodies that are not initially operating are made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display (main In the embodiment, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval production (big hit song). By doing so, it is possible to notify that restoration is in progress when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power failure recovery designation command and the third big prize opening designation command are received due to the recovery of the CPU 103, the image display device 5 is restored during the third special round interval period. The middle display 132SG510 is displayed, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c correspond to the state during recovery (for example, lights are turned off). , the background sound (BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during recovery, and this mode continues until the fourth big prize opening opening designation command is received. The invention is not limited to this, and for example, an interval performance may be performed during an introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)) and after the introduction part, and a result notification that notifies the result of the introduction part. (see FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)), the operation confirmation control is preferably performed before the result notification part is started. By doing so, it is possible to avoid obstructing the visibility of the result notification part in the interval performance due to the movable body that initially moves.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a movable body performance using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion performance in the result notification part (see FIG. 53 (F24)), and when the movable body performance is executed, It is possible to perform production operation control in the same operation mode as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B operated by the operation confirmation control, and the sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates due to the operation confirmation control. It is preferable that when the under-board movable body 32B moves in the movable body performance, a sound corresponding to the movable body performance is output. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily determine whether operation confirmation control or production operation control is being performed.

In addition, in the movable body performance in the result notification part, it is possible to display an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance, and it is possible to display the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B and the promotion performance by operation confirmation control. This is common to the operation mode of the under-panel movable body 32B (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the production position), and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally for a specific period, It is possible to determine an operation error and perform operation confirmation control again.In the first round game where an interval effect is executed, a power outage occurs just before the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, and after that, the power is cut off. If the operation confirmation control that starts when the input is performed does not end normally, the timing at which an operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and the promotion effect is executed during the specific period when the operation confirmation control is being performed. When this is executed, the movable body presentation may be restricted while an effect display may be displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to indicate to the player that the movable body performance has been executed by displaying an effect while preventing the motion confirmation control from being hindered by the promotion performance.

In addition, the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B during promotion performance (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position) are common, and the movable body The above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-disk movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed during operation confirmation control, and the performance operation control ( For example, in the case of a successful promotion in a promotion effect, the first period (e.g. advance movement period) will emit light in a rainbow flash mode, and the second period (e.g. evacuation movement period) will emit light in a rainbow flash mode. It emits light in different smooth rainbow modes. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily determine whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a movable body effect executed during the special round interval period after the opening control of the big prize opening in the third round game is finished, the movable body 32B under the board rises, and the corresponding Although we have exemplified a form in which a promotion effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than a 3-round jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable object effect is the promotion effect described above. In addition to performances, various types of movable body performances can be applied.

For example, in a specific round game during a jackpot, based on the detection that the game ball has passed the second count switch 132SG024, the game state after the jackpot is changed to a probability fluctuation state (the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state). In the case of a pachinko game machine that is in a state where the jackpot is a non-probable jackpot, as shown in FIG. A V promotion effect may be performed to inform the player that the game is a variable probability jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than a jackpot in which the game state after the game ends does not become a probability variable state.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 88, when this V promotion performance is composed of an introduction part and a result notification part that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, the big prize opening is closed. If a power outage occurs at the same time as the state is controlled, and then the power is turned on, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control is completed before the result notification part of the V promotion performance is started.

Form 9 (Power outage immediately before the start of a round game where a promotion effect is executed) <Variation>
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed will be explained based on FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the opening control of the big prize opening in the third round game is finished, a promotion performance (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval performance. ), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. It may be possible to execute the process during the period in which the opening control and closing control of the big prize opening are being performed.

In this case, the promotion effect includes an introduction part (see FIG. 53 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (FIG. 53 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part. ), and if the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify that jackpot A is a promotion failure, and the jackpot type will be higher than jackpot A (3R jackpot). When the jackpot B (10R jackpot) is advantageous to the player, the jackpot B is announced in a promotion success mode in the result notification part. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion performance can be executed when the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot (first hit).

Then, as shown in FIG. 89, after a power outage occurs just before the start of the third round performance of jackpots A and B in which the promotion performance is executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (when the power is restored) (When the power is turned on, the hot start process is executed), the control of the jackpot game state is restarted.

In detail, immediately before the third round performance in which the promotion performance is executed starts, the performance is controlled based on the receipt of the command indicating that the second round game has started. The timing immediately before the round production started by the CPU 120 ends, that is, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 finishes controlling the opening of the big winning opening in the second round game (for example, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends the opening control of the big winning opening in the second round game) The timing immediately before the control ends (for example, about 5000ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the big winning hole, or the timing when the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after being activated by hot start, the power failure recovery designation command and the second big winning hole opening designation command are received as the CPU 103 recovers, so that the performance control CPU 120 is activated during the second round interval period. Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in the corresponding mode (for example, turned off) during recovery, and the background sound ( BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during recovery. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. The restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see Figure 97), and the power is being restored until the next command, the 3rd big prize opening designation command, is received, that is, until the second round interval period ends. It is reported that this is the case.

After that, when the third big prize opening designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, and the upper frame movable body LED 9f are in the open emphasis mode for the first predetermined time. After the light is emitted, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) is started. In addition, the chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner that indicates that one of the multiple songs can be selected as the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), and the attacker LED 9c emits light in a manner that indicates that one of the background sounds (BGM) corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part) can be selected from among multiple songs. It emits light in a corresponding manner.

In addition, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the opening control of the big prize opening in the second round game ends, during the second round interval period (during recovery) or The operation confirmation control is started during the third round game, and is ended before the result notification part of the promotion performance executed in the third round game is started. In addition, during operation confirmation control, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) while the initial operation is in progress. It is designed to emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during operation control (promotion effect).

In this way, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the opening control of the big prize opening in the second round game ends, during the second round interval period or Operation confirmation control is started in the third round game, and the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body under the board LED 9e, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that initially operates are in the initial emphasis mode (lit white). Although it emits light, it emits light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (promotion performance), so it reduces power consumption when the power is turned on and reduces the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1. By setting the movable body LED to a lower brightness than when performing performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the opening control of the big prize opening in the second round game ends, The opening control of the grand prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the round game is started. .

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment 9, although the promotion effect is executed in the third round game, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed in the round games other than the third time. You can do it like this.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is initially operating emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not initially operating corresponds to the promotion effect (introduction part). However, the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), which draws attention to the movable body that performs the initial movement even during the promotion performance. becomes possible.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round game, and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the initial movement of the movable body on the board When the power is turned on, the body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) instead of the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part). It is possible to reduce power consumption and reduce load.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round game and then the power is turned on, or if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the process will not be executed in the third round game. Since the initial movement of the movable body is completed before the operation promotion part of the introduction part of the promotion effect, that is, the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B, is started, the movable body is operated by operation confirmation control. The visibility of the operation promotion effect in the introduction part is not obstructed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 explains that the under-board movable body 32B has the same operation mode (movement mode from the origin position to the performance position) when performing the initial operation and when performing the performance operation in the promoted performance, and when performing the initial operation. At this time, the movable LED 9e under the board emits light in a mode corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis mode; lit in white), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited and when a promotion operation is performed. In this case, the movable LED 9e under the panel emits light in a manner (for example, a rainbow mode) corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part), and a sound effect in a manner corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) is output. . By doing so, it is possible to easily determine whether either the initial action or the promotion effect is being executed.

In addition, in the movable body performance in the result notification part, it is possible to display an effect display (see FIG. 53 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance, and it is possible to display the operation mode of the underboard movable body 32B and the promotion performance based on the operation confirmation control. This is common to the operation mode of the under-panel movable body 32B (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the production position), and if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally for a specific period, It is possible to determine an operation error and perform operation confirmation control again, and if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which the promotion performance is executed, and then the power is turned on. When the operation confirmation control that is started does not end normally, the timing at which an operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion effect, and if the promotion effect is executed during the specific period during which the operation confirmation control is being performed, While the movable body presentation is restricted, an effect display may be displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to indicate to the player that the movable body performance has been executed by displaying an effect while preventing the motion confirmation control from being disturbed by the promotion performance.

Form 10 (Power outage just before the end of the final round game)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round game will be explained based on FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round game.

As shown in FIG. 90, the round effect that was started based on the reception of the big prize opening designation command indicating that the 10th round game (final round) in jackpots B, D, and E has started ends. When the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage has occurred immediately before (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is restarted.

In detail, immediately before the round performance ends, the round performance started by the performance control CPU 120 based on the reception of the big prize opening designation command indicating that the 10th round game has started ends. The timing immediately before, that is, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 finishes controlling the 10th round game (for example, the timing immediately before the opening control of the big prize opening in the final round game ends (for example, about 5000 ms before), or the timing immediately before the CPU 103 finishes controlling the 10th round game, This includes the timing when the number of balls is one ball before the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the big winning hole, the round interval period in the 10th round game, etc.

In this case, after being activated by hot start, the power failure recovery designation command and the 10th big winning hole opening designation command are received as the CPU 103 recovers, and the performance control CPU 120 is activated during the 10th round interval period. Assuming that, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in the corresponding mode (for example, turned off) during recovery, and the background sound ( BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during recovery. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. The recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed (see Figure 97), and until the next command, the jackpot end designation command, is received, that is, until the end of the 10th round interval period, it is announced that the power is being restored. Ru.

After that, when the jackpot end designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board bottom movable body LED 9e, and the frame top movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part). , the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) is started. Note that the chance button LED 9g and the attacker LED 9c emit light in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, white lighting or extinguishing).

In addition, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the 10th round game, the operation confirmation control will be started during the ending period, and the operation confirmation control will start before the end of the ending period. Operation confirmation control is now terminated. Note that the operation confirmation control may be started during the round interval period in the tenth round game. In addition, during operation confirmation control, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) while the initial operation is in progress. The light is emitted at a lower brightness than when it is emitted during operation control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect).

In this way, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the 10th final round game, the operation confirmation control is started during the ending period and the initial operation is performed. The movable body LED 9d on the board, the LED 9e under the board, the LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance) Since the light is emitted at a lower brightness than when it is emitted in the machine, the power consumption when the power is turned on is suppressed and the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. By setting the brightness to be lower than usual, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the 10th final round game, information regarding the time saving state is not displayed during the ending period. The ending period and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body ends before the time saving state notification part (see FIGS. 53 (F32) and (F34)) starts.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 10, although the example of operation in jackpots B, D, and E in which the final round is 10 rounds was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and jackpot A, in which the final round is 3 rounds, In the case of C, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the third and final round game, the time saving state notification will notify information regarding the time saving state during the ending period. The round game period and the initial movement period may be designed so that the initial movement of the movable body ends before the part (FIG. 52 (F13)) starts. Further, the final round is not limited to the above-mentioned 3 rounds or 10 rounds, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body that is initially operating emits light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and the movable body LED of the movable body that is not initially operating corresponds to the promotion effect (introduction part). However, the initial emphasizing mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part) to draw attention to the movable body that performs the initial movement even during the ending effect. becomes possible.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED 9d on the panel of the movable body that initially operates, and the movable body LED 9d below the panel. While the movable body LED 9e, frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), the movable body LEDs of other movable bodies that are not operating correspond to the ending effect (introduction part). By emitting light in this manner, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is moving under operation confirmation control even during the ending effect.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is turned on after that, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED 9d on the panel of the movable body that initially operates, and the movable body LED 9d below the panel. The movable LED 9e, the frame movable LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light at low brightness in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting) instead of the mode corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part), reducing the consumption when the power is turned on. It is possible to reduce power consumption and reduce load.

In addition, not only the movable LEDs but also the frame LEDs 9a and 9b should emit light at a lower brightness during the operation confirmation control period than when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the ending effect (introduction part). This makes it possible to reduce power consumption and reduce load when the power is turned on, without reducing the decorative effect.

Form 11 (Power outage immediately after the start of the ending performance)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect will be explained based on FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 91, immediately after the round interval effect in the 10th round game (final round) in jackpots B, D, and E ends, the ending effect is started based on receiving the jackpot end designation command. After a power outage occurs, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot game state is restarted.

Immediately after the ending performance starts, specifically, the timing immediately after the performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the ending performance based on receiving the jackpot end designation command, that is, the timing when the CPU 103 controls the ending period. This includes the timing immediately after the start (for example, the timing immediately after finishing the closing control of the big prize opening in the final round game (for example, about 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after being activated with a hot start, only the power failure recovery designation command is received as the CPU 103 recovers, so the production control CPU 120 remains in the gaming state until it receives the next command (for example, a customer waiting demo designation command, etc.). It is not possible to specify the state (such as whether it is in the ending period or not). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are in the corresponding mode (for example, turned off) during the recovery, and the background sound (BGM) has a corresponding aspect (for example, silence) during recovery. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. The restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power is being restored from the power outage until the next command is received.

After that, when the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper panel movable body LED 9d, the lower panel movable body LED 9e, and the upper frame movable body LED 9f are set in a manner corresponding to the high bass music (time-saving medium production). At the same time as the light is emitted, the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the high bass music (time-saving medium performance) is started. Note that the chance button LED 9g emits light in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lights up in white or goes out), and the attacker LED 9c goes out.

In addition, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance, the operation confirmation control will start during the ending period, and the operation confirmation control will start before the end of the ending period. It is set to end. In addition, during operation confirmation control, the panel movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial emphasis mode (white lighting) while the initial operation is in progress. The light is emitted at a lower brightness than when it is emitted during operation control (movable body effect in the win/fail button effect).

In this way, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance, the operation confirmation control will be started during the ending period, and the initial operation will be performed on the board of the movable body. The movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), but from when they emit light in the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/fail button performance). Since it emits light at a low brightness, it reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and also allows the movable body LED provided on the movable body to have a low brightness when executing performance operation control. This prevents the movement of the movable body from becoming difficult to confirm due to glare.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending effect, information regarding the time saving state is notified during the ending period. The ending period and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body ends before the state notification part (see FIGS. 53 (F32) and (F34)) starts.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form 10, although the example of operation in jackpots B, D, and E in which the final round is 10 rounds was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and jackpot A, in which the final round is 3 rounds, In the case of C, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the end of the third and final round game, the time saving state notification will notify information regarding the time saving state during the ending period. The round game period and the initial movement period may be designed so that the initial movement of the movable body ends before the part (FIG. 52 (F13)) starts.

In addition, although the ending period of jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpot) was explained above as an example, the ending period of jackpots A and C (3-round jackpot) operates in the same way, so a detailed explanation will be provided. omitted.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can handle two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and then the power is turned on. The image display device 5 displays the restoration indication 132SG510, and displays the operating on-panel movable body LED9d, under-panel movable body LED9e, and frame-top movable body LED9f in a mode corresponding to the restoration in progress display 132SG510 (for example, initial emphasis mode). It is possible to control the light emission during recovery to emit light (white light), and if a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, or immediately after the ending effect starts, Thereafter, it is possible to perform operation confirmation control when the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the processing at power-on from becoming complicated.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is turned on after that, the performance control CPU 120 displays the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and displays the movable body that is in initial operation. It is possible to make the above board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B emit light in the initial emphasis mode (white lighting), and a power outage will occur immediately after the start of the ending effect. , When the power is turned on after that, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B of the movable body that is not in initial operation are displayed as being restored for the ending period. The initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (lights out) corresponding to the recovery display. In this way, even during recovery, it is possible to draw attention to the movable body being operated by the operation confirmation control.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the panel bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are excluded from the movable bodies that are in initial operation during power recovery. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the panel bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are excluded from the movable bodies that are in initial operation during power recovery. Although the light emitting mode (lights out) is shown as an example, this light emitting mode (lights out) is not used for performance operation control (movable object performance in the win/fail button performance). By doing this, even if the ending performance is being performed before the power is cut off, it is possible to notify that the system is being restored when the power is turned on.

Forms 12 and 20 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays during time saving)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during time saving will be explained based on FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on the fact that a power outage occurs during time saving and then the power is turned on. In FIG. 93, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), in the time-saving states B, C1, and C2, a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is executed as a time-saving effect. In the BATTLE RUSH performance, the second background display 132SG320 representing a nighttime cityscape corresponding to the time saving state and an image of an ally character and an enemy character facing each other are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. . Further, at the top of the screen, a performance mode display 132SG221 consisting of the words "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, a time saving remaining display 132SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX= 0 to 685) are displayed, and a right-handed driving promotion display 132SG430 consisting of the words "right-handed hitting" and a right-pointing arrow is displayed at the upper right side of the screen of the image display device 5, and a right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. A number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played display 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls played during the consecutive hits is displayed.

In addition, in the display area 5SL at the upper left of the screen, small symbols corresponding to the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and the decorative symbols are displayed, and on the left side of the screen, the active display area 132SG013 and the second pending memory number are displayed. A second pending display area 132SG012 corresponding to the memory is provided in the vertical direction, and for example, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, which corresponds to the fact that the value of the second pending memory number is 4. Then, four second hold displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second hold display area 132SG012.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32a is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonally shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. , the support portion 32b is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonally shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Further, when the underboard movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32c and the support section 32d are movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the second reservation display area 132SG012 in which the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430 and the second reservation display 132SG002 are displayed is displayed at a position where only the support portion 32b of the on-board movable body 32A can overlap, and The display area 5SL in which the display is displayed is displayed at a position where the production section 32a and the support section 32b can overlap, and the production mode display 132SG221 is displayed at a position where the production section 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the display 132SG454 for the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played and the time saving remaining display 132SG201 are displayed at a position where the production section 32c and the support section 32d of the underboard movable body 32B can partially overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform an initial operation will be described based on FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B). In addition, in FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B), the description of the production mode display 132SG221 and the time saving remaining display 132SG201 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430, the second pending memory number (display area 5SL), the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display 132SG002), 2 pending display area 132SG012), the number of consecutive games/total number of balls played 132SG454, the remaining time saving display 132SG201, and the production mode display 132SG221, so the player can see all of the displays (Fig. 93 (See (A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, the effect part 32a overlaps with the front side of the second pending storage number display (display area 5SL), so that the player cannot visually check the display. It becomes difficult (or impossible) (see FIG. 92(B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the intermediate position and the second reserved memory number display becomes visible, the support part 32b overlaps with the front side of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, so that the player can play right-handed. It becomes difficult (or impossible) to visually recognize the promotion display 132SG430 (see FIG. 92(C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the production position, the right-hitting promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but a part of the second reservation display 132SG002 (second reservation display area 132SG012) Due to the overlapping of the production parts 32a on the front side, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize the second hold display 132SG002, but the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second hold memory number display, the number of consecutive games/total number of games played, etc. Since the ball count display 132SG454, time saving remaining display 132SG201, and production mode display 132SG221 do not overlap in any of the production section 32a and the support section 32b, the player can visually recognize these displays (see FIG. 92(D)).

In addition, when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same, but the on-board movable body 32A moves from the origin position to the production position. Since the moving speed of the retracting operation in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the production position to the origin position is slower, as shown in FIG. As the length increases, the time during which it is difficult for the player to see the screen also increases.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430, the second reservation memory number (display area 5SL), the second reservation display 132SG002 (Second pending display area 132SG012), number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played display 132SG454, and remaining time reduction display 132SG201, so the player can see all of the displays (FIG. 92(D) reference).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and even after reaching the production position, the right-hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL), the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), and the performance mode display 132SG221, so the player can visually check these displays, but the number of consecutive games/total Since the presentation part 32c and the support part 32d overlap on the front side of a part of the ball count display 132SG454 and the time saving remaining display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize these displays (FIG. 92(D) , (see (E)). Incidentally, even when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, if an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during time saving, the movable body 32A on the panel is activated during hot start and recovery, the second pending memory number (display area 5SL) and the second The time during which it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) is displayed by the underboard movable body 32B displaying jackpot information regarding jackpots (for example, number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played). Since each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time that overlaps with display 132SG454) is set to be shorter than the time that overlaps with display 132SG454), the degree of influence on the game is reduced by the on-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B that initially operate. The visibility of the high second pending storage number (display area 5SL) and the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) is less likely to be obstructed.

In other words, in a time-saving state that is advantageous for the player by executing variable display of the second special symbol by right-handed operation, the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) and the second If the hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) is covered, the player will miss the opportunity to generate a second start win by right-handed operation during the period in which it is possible to generate a second start win. , the player may suffer a disadvantage, so the visibility of the second pending storage number (display area 5SL) and the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) is maintained compared to other jackpot information displays. It is preferable that the

In addition, while the number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, the second pending storage number (display area 5SL) and the second pending display 132SG002 show changes in the number of winnings and advance previews even in the time-saving state. The display mode can be changed by Therefore, the visibility of the second reservation memory, which may change, is prevented from being obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B, which initially operate, compared to the unchanging number of consecutive hits/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454. can.

In addition, due to the initial operation, the on-board movable body 32A is larger than the range where the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second pending storage number (display area 5SL) or the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012). It is preferable that the range overlapping with the number of consecutive shots/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454 is larger, and by doing so, it is possible to change depending on the above-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B that initially operate. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory from being obstructed compared to the display 132SG454 of consecutive hits/total number of balls played which does not change.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B), if the initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during time saving, the movable body 32A on the panel is activated by a hot start, and then recovered. The time when the promotion display 132SG430 is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is longer than the time when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454). Since each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the distance is shortened, the visibility of the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, which has a high influence on the game, is increased by the initial movement of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B. becomes less likely to be disturbed.

In other words, in a time-saving state that is advantageous for the player by executing the variable display of the second special symbol due to a right-handed operation, the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is overridden by the above-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B which are initially operated. If this occurs, the player may miss the opportunity to generate a second starting prize by performing a right-handed operation during the period in which it is possible to generate a second starting winning, which may put the player at a disadvantage. It is preferable that the visibility of the right hitting promotion display 132SG430 is maintained compared to other jackpot information displays.

In addition, if the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B operate in the same manner as the predetermined production operation control during operation confirmation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the production position), the power will be cut off during the time saving. If the initial operation is performed after starting up with a hot start and recovering after this occurs, the time period during which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 and becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. , if the time that the lower board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive hits/total ball count display 132SG454) is approximately the same or longer, the upper board movable body 32A and the lower board movable body 32B are , the time when the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, the under-board movable body 32B displays jackpot information regarding jackpots (for example, number of consecutive hits/total balls played). The operation may be performed in such a manner that the time overlapping the number display 132SG454) is shorter than the time overlapping.

For example, in the initial operation, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are not moved from the origin position to a position that overlaps with the second pending storage number, second pending display 132SG002, or right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, but to an intermediate position. What is necessary is to return to the origin position after the movement. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second pending storage number, the second pending display 132SG002, and the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430 from being obstructed by the movable body that operates during the initial motion.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B), if the initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during time saving, the movable body 32A on the panel is activated by a hot start, and then recovered. During times when the promotion display 132SG430 is overlapped and difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, the on-board movable body 32A displays the second pending memory number (display area 5SL) or the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display). By setting each movable body to initially operate so as to be shorter than the time during which it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the area 132SG012), the second hold memory number and the second hold The visibility of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, which has a higher influence on the game than the display 132SG002, is less likely to be obstructed.

In addition, in configurations 12 and 20, the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430, the second pending storage number (display area 5SL), the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454), but in this embodiment, in the operation confirmation control, the information is actually displayed when the movable body makes the initial movement. Although we have exemplified a form in which the total time that overlaps with the above various displays is compared, the display area where the above various displays are displayed when the movable body makes its initial movement, regardless of whether the above various displays are displayed or not. It suffices if the overlapping time has the above relationship.

Form 13 (power outage immediately before the end of the variation before the button notification is executed)
Next, operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed will be described based on FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 94, after the variable display based on a predetermined deviation fluctuation pattern is started, the combination of losing symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, The period during which a combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbol starts in the next variable display, etc. ), when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the variable display will be restarted if there is a suspended memory. However, the variable display ends immediately and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure recovery designation command and symbol confirmation command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103, the next command is executed. Until a certain variable display start designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the panel bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the mode corresponding to recovery (for example, turned off). Therefore, the background sound (BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. A restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol confirmation display period.

After that, based on the reception of the variable display start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command, in the variable display preview performance determination process (step S132SG610), a reach preview that incites whether or not the ready-to-reach mode will be entered, and a reach-to-reach notice that will be in the ready-to-reach mode It is decided to execute a button notice that prompts a button operation to decide whether or not to proceed, and a variable display is started in a manner according to the fluctuation pattern and the determined notice effect, and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the movable body LED 9d on the panel, and the bottom panel The movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the fluctuation (background), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the fluctuation (background) is started. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fluctuation (background) starts.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. Thereafter, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, a result notification part in which the result of the button preview is notified is started.

In the button preview (result notification part), as shown in FIGS. 50 (D6) and (D7), the result of the player's operation of the chance button 631B as to whether or not the player is in a reach mode is announced. If the initial movement of the movable body is being executed when the notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part will be obstructed, such as when the movable body that moves due to the initial movement is in a reach mode, and the player will not be able to see the result. There is a risk of misunderstanding.

In this embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed, the button notice (result notification part) is Since the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before it starts, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the button preview (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body that performs the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed, the period until the button notice (result notification part) is started (see FIG. 50). The period from the start of variation to the start of the button notice (result notification part) and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within D1) to D5).

In this embodiment, the number of pending memories is 1 or more when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, and after that, the power is turned on, the pending memory is consumed, and the next variable display starts. If it is decided to execute the button notice at the start of the variable display, the result notification part of the button notice is executed after the variable display starts. By setting the time until the button notice is executed to be longer than at least the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds), the power is cut off immediately before the end of the variation before the button notice is executed. Although the example has been exemplified in which the initial movement of the movable body ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts when a winning occurs, the present invention is not limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that the specific variation pattern is one in which a button preview is executed, a specific performance control command that specifies specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning performance designation command that specifies execution of a button preview) ) is transmitted, and based on the specific performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial action so that the initial action is completed before the button notice result notification part starts. You can do it like this.

For example, if it is decided to use a specific variation pattern in which a button notice is executed when a starting winning occurs during a predetermined variable display, when a winning is specified as a specific variation pattern (with button notice). A production designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a symbol confirmation command (information on whether the special symbol is correct or not), a first pending memory number notification command, and a second pending memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the symbols are stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the effect design confirmation designation command, and after the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display is started, the first pending storage number notification command and the first 2. A pending storage number notification command, a gaming state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a symbol confirmation command, and a variable pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with button notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000ms) after receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 2000ms) is received. (seconds) may be interrupted to switch to a shortened initial motion having a shorter operation period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial motion being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retreat motion (reciprocation between the origin position and the production position) of each movable body are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retreat motion of each movable body are performed in order. The operations (for example, returning to the origin immediately after exiting the origin position) may be performed at the same time. In addition, switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation can be done by, for example, if one movable body is in the process of maximally advancing, the movement is interrupted, the retraction operation is performed, and as soon as the first movable body returns to the home position, the first movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the movable body may be performed at the same time. In addition, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is just before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), make sure that the switch to the shortened initial operation does not occur even if a specific fluctuation pattern designation command is received. Bye.

For example, it is possible to execute a light-gathering effect (light gathers in the center of the screen to form a button image) immediately before a button image is displayed in an action promotion effect, and the light-gathering effect can be performed using a large screen effect (the edge of the screen (image starting from ), it may overlap with the execution period of the initial operation, and it can be conveniently notified that the button image will be displayed.

For example, when a button image in an action promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to cause the button's LED to emit light (red ⇔ off 150ms cycle), and the light emission mode in this light emission pattern is a light emission that emphasizes the movable object that is initially moving. Not included in the pattern.

Furthermore, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial operation (to confirm the vibration motor 635E and notify the start of the initial), and to vibrate the chance button 631B at the same time as displaying the button image in the operation promotion effect ( The button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when displaying the button image are different in at least one of the vibration period, period, and light emission mode of the button LED during vibration. .

Form 14 (Power interruption immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the start-time notice is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the start notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 95, after the variable display based on the predetermined deviation fluctuation pattern is started, the combination of losing symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, The period during which a combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbol starts in the next variable display, etc. , approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), and then the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the suspended memory is In some cases, although the variable display is restarted, the variable display ends immediately and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure recovery designation command and symbol confirmation command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103, the next command is executed. Until a certain variable display start designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the panel bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the mode corresponding to recovery (for example, turned off). Therefore, the background sound (BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. A restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol confirmation display period.

Thereafter, based on the reception of the variable display start designation command and the variable pattern designation command, execution of the start notice is determined in the variable display preview performance determination process (step S132SG610), and the variable pattern and determined preview performance are determined. The variable display is started in a mode corresponding to the frame LED 9a, 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the panel bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in a mode corresponding to the predetermined display change in the start notice. At the same time, the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the start notice starts. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2000 ms) has elapsed after receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the start preview (introduction part) starts. Ru.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. Thereafter, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, a result notification part is started in which the result of the start notice is notified.

In the start notice (result notification part), as shown in Figures 48 (B3a) to (B6a), results such as whether or not the pending display has changed and what color it has changed are announced. If the initial movement of the movable body is being executed when the notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether or not the pending display has changed, will be obstructed by the movable body that moves due to the initial movement, and the player may misinterpret the results.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the start notice is executed, the start notice (result notification part) is activated. ), the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start of the initial motion, so it is possible to prevent the visibility of the start notice (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body that performs the initial motion.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the start notice is executed, the period until the start notice (result notification part) starts (see Figure 48 (B2) to (B6))), the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within 48 (B2) to (B6)). There is.

In this embodiment, the number of pending memories is 1 or more when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, and after that, the power is turned on, the pending memory is consumed, and the next variable display starts. If it is decided to execute the start notice at the start of the variable display, the start notice will be executed after the variable display starts. By setting the time until the result notification part is executed to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds), the start notice (result notification part) is executed. Although the example has been exemplified in which the initial motion of the movable body ends before the start notice (result notification part) starts when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the previous variation, the present invention is limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that this is a specific variation pattern in which a start notice is executed when a starting winning occurs, instead of a winning prize, a specific effect control command (for example, A winning effect designation command that specifies execution of the start time notice is transmitted, and based on the specific effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 causes the initial operation to be completed by the time the start time notice results notification part starts. Furthermore, the execution period of the initial operation may be made changeable.

For example, if it is determined that a specific variation pattern is to be executed with a notice at the time of start when a starting winning occurs during a predetermined variable display, it is specified that the pattern is a specific variation pattern (with notice at the time of start). A winning performance designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a symbol confirmation command (information on whether the special symbol is correct or not), a first pending memory number notification command, and a second pending memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the symbols are stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the effect design confirmation designation command, and after the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display is started, the first pending storage number notification command and the first 2. A pending storage number notification command, a gaming state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a symbol confirmation command, and a variable pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with advance notice at start) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000ms) after receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted to switch to a shortened initial motion having a shorter operation period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial motion being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retreat motion (reciprocation between the origin position and the production position) of each movable body are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retreat motion of each movable body are performed in order. The operations (for example, returning to the origin immediately after leaving the origin) may be performed at the same time. In addition, switching from the initial motion to the shortened initial motion can be done by, for example, if one movable body is in the midst of a maximum advance motion, that motion is interrupted, the retreat motion is performed, and as soon as the first movable body returns to the home position, the first movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the movable body may be performed at the same time. In addition, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is just before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), make sure that the switch does not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific fluctuation pattern designation command is received. Bye.

Furthermore, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial operation, and it is also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold turns red in FIG. 48 (B6) (for lively purposes). This is possible, and at least one of the vibration period, period, and light emission mode of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the button changes to red. If the button vibration when the button changes to red is performed during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color changes to red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation is completed.

Further, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B at the start of the initial operation, and it is also possible to give a button vibration notice (suggesting a degree of expectation different from the start notice) in FIG. 48 (B1). The button vibration at the time of the initial operation and the button vibration notice differ in at least one of the period of vibration, the cycle, and the light emission mode of the button LED at the time of vibration. If a button vibration notice is given during the initial operation, the button vibration notice is limited, and the limited button vibration is made after the initial action is completed.

Form 15 (power outage immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the pseudo continuous notice is executed)
Next, operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the pseudo continuous notice is executed will be described based on FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before the pseudo continuous notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 96, after the variable display based on a predetermined deviation fluctuation pattern is started, the combination of losing symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, The period during which a combination of missing symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fixed symbol display period which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbol starts in the next variable display, etc. , approximately 5000 ms before the end of the variable display), and the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (the hot start process is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the suspended memory is In some cases, although the variable display is restarted, the variable display ends immediately and the next variable display starts.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after receiving the power failure recovery designation command and symbol confirmation command transmitted based on the recovery of the CPU 103, the next command is executed. Until a certain variable display start designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the panel movable body LED 9d, the panel bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in the mode corresponding to recovery (for example, turned off). Therefore, the background sound (BGM) becomes a corresponding mode (for example, silence) during restoration. In addition, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the words "Power is being restored. Please wait for a while" are displayed on a black background, indicating that the power is being restored. A restoration display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 97), and it is notified that the power is being restored until the next command is received, that is, during the symbol confirmation display period.

After that, based on the reception of the variable display start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command, a variation pattern (pseudo series) in which a pseudo continuous notice indicating whether or not the variable display will restart is executed and the determined notice effect. The variable display starts in a manner according to the (movable object notice), and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable object LED 9d, the under-board movable object LED 9e, the above-frame movable object LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g correspond to the background (variation). At the same time, the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (fluctuation) is started. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the background (variation) starts.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is started. Thereafter, after the initial motion of each movable body is completed, a result notification part is started in which the result of the pseudo continuous notice is notified.

In the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part), as shown in FIG. 49 (C6), (C10), and (C9), results such as whether the variable display has resumed are notified, so the result notification part starts. If the initial motion of the movable body is being executed when the movable body moves due to the initial motion, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the variable display has resumed or not, will be obstructed, and the player may misunderstand the result. There is a possibility that

In this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the pseudo consecutive notice is executed, the pseudo consecutive notice (result notification part) is activated. ) is started, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation is completed before the start of the movable body, so it is possible to prevent the visibility of the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body that performs the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the pseudo continuous notice is executed, the period until the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part) starts (see Figure 48 (B2) to (B6))), the period from the start of fluctuation to the start of the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part) and the initial movement period are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within 48 (B2) to (B6)). There is.

In this embodiment, since the execution of the movable body notice is determined at the same time as the execution of the pseudo continuous notice, the movable body notice is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variable display. is being executed, as described in the first embodiment, the performance operations of the movable body 32A on the board and the chance button 631B at the execution timing of the movable body notice are restricted, and the effect display corresponding to the movable body notice and Only the sound effects may be output (see FIG. 66). In addition, in the first embodiment, after the initial action is completed, the effect movement of the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is executed, but since the pseudo continuous notice (introduction part) has started, the effect movement of the movable body notice is executed. Although this is limited, it is also possible to perform a moving object preview performance operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of pending memories is 1 or more when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, and after that, the power is turned on, the pending memory is consumed, and the next variable display starts. If it is decided to execute a pseudo consecutive notice at the start of a variable display, the pseudo consecutive notice is executed after the variable display starts. By setting the time until the result notification part is executed to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, about 20 seconds), the fluctuation in the execution of the pseudo continuous notice (result notification part) can be reduced. Although the example has been exemplified in which the initial motion of the movable body ends before the pseudo continuous notification (result notification part) starts when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the previous fluctuation, the present invention is limited to this. If the CPU 103 determines that this is a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous notice is executed when a starting winning occurs, instead of a special variation pattern, a specific effect control command that specifies specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, A winning performance designation command that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive notice is transmitted, and based on the specific performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 causes the initial operation to be completed before the pseudo consecutive notice result notification part starts. Furthermore, the execution period of the initial operation may be made changeable.

For example, if it is determined that the specific variation pattern is such that a pseudo-continuation notice is executed when a starting winning occurs during a predetermined variable display, it is specified that the pattern is a specific variation pattern (with a pseudo-continuation notice). A winning performance designation command (specific information) is transmitted.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of a predetermined variable display, when the power is turned on, a power failure recovery designation command, a symbol confirmation command (information on whether the special symbol is correct or not), a first pending memory number notification command, and a second pending memory number A notification command is sent and the initial operation is started. Next, the symbols are stopped and displayed based on the transmission of the effect design confirmation designation command, and after the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display is started, the first pending storage number notification command and the first 2. A pending storage number notification command, a gaming state background designation command, a first (or second) variable display start designation command, a symbol confirmation command, and a variable pattern designation command are transmitted.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a specific fluctuation pattern (with pseudo continuous notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000ms) after receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the initial operation being executed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted to switch to a shortened initial motion having a shorter operation period (for example, 5 seconds) than the initial motion being executed.

Specifically, in the initial motion, the maximum advance motion and retreat motion (reciprocation between the origin position and the production position) of each movable body are performed in order, while in the shortened initial motion, the minimum advance motion and retreat motion of each movable body are performed in order. The operations (for example, returning to the origin immediately after exiting the origin position) may be performed at the same time. In addition, switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation can be done by, for example, if one movable body is in the process of maximally advancing, the movement is interrupted, the retraction operation is performed, and as soon as the first movable body returns to the home position, the first movable body The minimum advancing motion and the retracting motion of each movable body including the movable body may be performed at the same time. In addition, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation is just before the end of the initial operation (for example, 5 seconds before the end), make sure that the switch to the shortened initial operation does not occur even if a specific fluctuation pattern designation command is received. Bye.

Also, for example, if the power is turned on after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation that precedes the variation in which the movable body notice/pseudo continuous notice is executed, the movable body notice that was executed or restricted during the initial operation The performance motion is performed during the introduction part of the pseudo-continuous performance (a short initial motion is performed in FIG. 49 (C4), and a performance motion in the restricted movable body preview is performed in FIG. 49 (C5)).

Form 16 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during normal fluctuation)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during normal fluctuation will be explained based on FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on a power outage occurring during normal fluctuation and then power being turned on. In FIG. 98, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal gaming state, the startup preparation displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing After the display 132SG500 is hidden, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Restoring power. Please wait for a while" indicating that the power is being restored from the power outage on a black background, and the next command is received. You will be notified that the power outage is being restored.

Then, during the period in which the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, based on the fact that a game ball is detected by a detection switch provided in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5, such as the gate switch 21, When it is detected that the player is playing a right-handed game, the production control CPU 120 displays a left-handed playing promotion display 132SG530 consisting of the words "Please return to left-handed playing" and a left-pointing arrow on the upper right side of the display screen. is displayed, and the user is encouraged to perform an operation to launch the game ball into the left side game area (first path) of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32a is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. , the support portion 32b is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonally shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Further, when the underboard movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32c and the support section 32d are movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect part 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect part 32c of the under-board movable body 32B overlap, and the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A part of the production section 32a and the support section 32b are displayed at a position where they can overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform an initial operation will be described based on FIGS. 98(A) and 98(B). In addition, in FIGS. 98(A) and 98(B), the relationship between the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, and the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 is displayed, and the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 (FIG. 84, (see FIG. 93).

As shown in FIG. 98(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530, so the player can The entire display becomes visible (see FIG. 97(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, a part of the production section 32a and the support section 32b overlap on the front side of the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530, so that the player is encouraged to play left-handed. It becomes difficult (or impossible) to visually recognize the display 132SG530 (see FIG. 97(B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes and the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 becomes visible, but when it descends to the production position, the production part 32a overlaps with the front side of a part of the recovery display 132SG510. , it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the recovery display 132SG510 (see FIG. 97(C)).

In addition, when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same, but the on-board movable body 32A moves from the origin position to the production position. Since the moving speed of the retracting operation in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower, as shown in FIG. As the length increases, the time during which it is difficult for the player to see the screen also increases.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98(A), when the underboard movable body 32B is located at the origin position, the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530, the restoring display 132SG510, and the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 overlap. Therefore, the player can see all of the displays (see FIG. 97(A)).

Next, while the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the presentation position, and after reaching the presentation position, the restoration display 132SG510 overlaps the presentation section 32a on the front side. While this makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the recovery display 132SG510, the player can see the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 because it does not overlap with the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 ( (See FIGS. 97(D) and (E)). Incidentally, even when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the normal state, and the initial operation is performed when the hot start is started and the recovery is performed, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530. It is set so that the time during which it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position, and during the period when the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the production position or the origin position. Since they do not overlap, the visibility of the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B which initially operate the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the period in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 is longer than the period in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, but The hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed in a time saving state or a jackpot game state that is advantageous for the player, and if the right hitting promotion display 132SG430 is covered by the movable body 32A on the board that is initially operated, the player will not be able to move to the right. Since the player may miss an opportunity to win a prize due to a hitting operation and suffer a disadvantage, it is preferable that the visibility of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is maintained compared to the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can display a left-handed game promotion display 132SG530 and output a left-handed game promotion notification sound as a left-handed game promotion notification, and can perform a cold start after a power outage occurs. When operation confirmation control is performed based on the activation, the left-handed operation promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, while the left-handed operation promotion notification sound is limited, and after a power outage occurs, hot start When the operation confirmation control is performed based on the activation, it is preferable that the left-handed driving promotion display 132SG530 is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, and that a left-handed operation promotion notification sound is output. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable left-handed operation promotion notification that takes into account the situation when the power is turned on.

In addition, in the normal state, when a game ball enters the gate switch 21 etc. provided on the right game area side, it is possible to perform a left-handed operation promotion notification. It is possible to perform a special left-handed batting operation promotion notification that has a higher priority than the left-handed batting operation promotion notification based on the fact that (for example, 5 pieces) have entered, and it is possible to perform a special left-handed batting operation promotion notification that has a higher priority than the left-handed batting operation promotion notification, and the period during which the movable body is operated by operation confirmation control (for example, , 20 seconds), it is possible to perform the special left-handed batting operation promotion notification for a longer period of time. It is possible to prevent the special left-handed batting operation promotion notification from being obstructed by the movable body operated by the operation confirmation control.

Forms 17 and 18 (Relationship between initial action and various displays during recovery during jackpot)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot will be explained based on FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on a power outage occurring during a jackpot and then power being turned on. In FIG. 100, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the under-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in FIG. 99(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot gaming state, the startup preparation displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing After the display 132SG500 is hidden, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed with the text "Restoring power. Please wait for a while" indicating that the power is being restored from the power outage on a black background, and the next command is received. You will be notified that the power outage is being restored.

In addition, if a control command indicating a jackpot gaming state is received, such as an opening specification command or an after-release specification command, along with a power failure recovery specification command, the right side of the display screen will be A right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed above, and the player is encouraged to perform an operation to hit the game ball into the right-hand game area (second path) of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 97(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32a is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. , the support portion 32b is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonally shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Further, when the underboard movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32c and the support section 32d are movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect part 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect part 32c of the under-board movable body 32B overlap, and the right-hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A part of the production section 32a and the support section 32b are displayed at a position where they can overlap.

Next, the relationship between various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform an initial operation will be described based on FIGS. 100(A) and 100(B).

As shown in FIG. 100(A), when the movable body 32A on the board is located at the origin position, neither the recovery display 132SG510 nor the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 overlap, so the player can The entire display becomes visible (see FIG. 99(A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, the supporting portion 32b overlaps with the front side of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530 ( (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes and the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 becomes visible, but when it descends to the production position, the production part 32a overlaps with the front side of a part of the recovery display 132SG510. , it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the recovery display 132SG510 (see FIG. 99(B)).

In addition, when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same, but the on-board movable body 32A moves from the origin position to the production position. Since the moving speed of the retracting operation in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the overlap time is longer during the retracting operation than during the advancing operation As the length increases, the time during which it is difficult for the player to see the screen also increases.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100(A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, the player cannot All the displays become visible (see FIG. 99(A)).

Next, while the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and after reaching the production position, the recovery display 132SG510 overlaps the production part 32a on the front side. While this makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the recovery display 132SG510, the player can see the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 because it does not overlap with the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 ( (See FIG. 99(C)). Incidentally, even when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, after a power outage occurs during a round game in the jackpot game state, if the initial operation is performed when the hot start is started and the recovery is resumed, the on-board movable body 32A displays information corresponding to the round game ( For example, the number of rounds displayed 132SG451, the number of winning pitches displayed 132SG452, the number of pitched balls displayed 132SG453, the number of consecutive hits/total number of pitched balls displayed 132SG454, etc.) are superimposed on the front side of a predetermined area (see FIG. 83(A)). Since the operation is performed so as not to overlap with the front side of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, the visibility of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, a predetermined area (see FIG. 83(A It is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period overlapping on the front side of the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 (see ).

In addition, after a power outage occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is the effect of the movable body notice in which the support portion 32b overlaps the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430 (between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during a variable display in a time-saving state, the initial action when the power is turned on overlaps with the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the motion is performed in a manner that does not include the presentation motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body preview.

In addition, when a round game movable body performance is performed at the start of a round game, the initial operation when the power is turned on is an operation that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body performance. Preferably, the method is carried out in the following manner.

In addition, if an initial operation is performed when the power is cut off during a round game in the jackpot game state, and the initial operation is performed after starting up with a hot start and recovering, the movable body 32A on the board will be superimposed on the front side of the recovery display 132SG510. Since the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is operated so as not to overlap with the front side of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, the visibility of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period overlapping on the front side of the display 132SG510 during recovery.

In addition, after a power outage occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is the effect of the movable body notice in which the support portion 32b overlaps the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430 (between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during a variable display in a time-saving state, the initial action when the power is turned on overlaps with the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the motion is performed in a manner that does not include the presentation motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body preview.

In addition, when a round game movable body performance is performed at the start of a round game, the initial operation when the power is turned on is an operation that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body performance. Preferably, the method is carried out in the following manner.

Further, the time during which the under-board movable body 32B stays at the performance position overlapping the restoration display 132SG510 may be set to be shorter in the initial operation than in the performance operation of the movable body performance. For example, when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs while the variable display is not being performed, the stay time T1 of the movable object at the presentation position during the initial operation and the stay time of the movable object at the presentation position during the movable object presentation. It is preferable that the time T2 is longer than the stay time T3 of the movable body at the presentation position during the initial operation when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during execution of variable display (T1=T2>T3) . By doing this, if a power outage occurs during an advantageous state and then the movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on will not be superimposed on the recovery display 132SG510 for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not interfere with determining whether or not it is being restored.

Form 19 (Relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during time saving)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during time saving will be explained based on FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the movable body when operation confirmation control is started based on a power outage occurring during time saving and then power being turned on.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time saving state, a startup preparation display is displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing. After the 132SG500 is hidden, the recovery display 132SG510 will be displayed with the text "Power restoration in progress, please wait" indicating that the power is being restored on a black background, until the next command is received. You will be notified that the power is being restored.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32a is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. , the support portion 32b is movable in the vertical direction in a diagonally shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Further, when the underboard movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation section 32c and the support section 32d are movable in the vertical direction in a diagonal area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed at a position where the effect part 32a of the on-board movable body 32A and the effect part 32c of the under-board movable body 32B overlap, and the right-hitting promotion display 132SG430 is displayed on the on-board movable body 32A. A part of the production section 32a and the support section 32b are displayed at a position where they can overlap (see FIG. 101(C)).

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, neither the recovery display 132SG510 nor the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 overlap, so the player can The entire display becomes visible.

Next, when the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A is started, the variable display is stopped based on the symbol confirmation command being transmitted, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 is finished, and the second background display 132SG320 is In this case, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430, so that the player can visually recognize the left-handed hitting promotion display 132SG530. becomes difficult (or impossible) (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes through and the area where the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the production position, the production section 32a is displayed on the front side of a part of the recovery display 132SG510. As a result, the player has difficulty (or is unable) to visually recognize a part of the recovery display 132SG510 (see FIG. 101(B)).

In addition, when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps each display is the same, but the on-board movable body 32A moves from the origin position to the production position. Since the moving speed of the retracting motion in which the upper movable body 32A moves from the production position to the origin position is slower, the overlapping time is longer during the retracting motion than during the advancing motion, making it difficult for the player to see. It also takes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101(A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, the player cannot All displays can be viewed.

Next, while the underboard movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and rises to the production position, and after reaching the production position, the recovery display 132SG510 overlaps the production part 32a on the front side. While this makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to visually recognize a part of the recovery display 132SG510, the player can see the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 because it does not overlap with the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 ( (See FIG. 101(C)). Incidentally, even when returning from the production position to the origin position, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display is the same.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time-saving state, and the initial operation is performed when the hot start is started and the recovery is performed, the movable body 32A on the panel displays information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, , production mode display 132SG221, time saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive hits/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.) Since the operation is performed so that the right hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed during confirmation control does not overlap on the front side of the specific area (see FIG. 101(A)), the display of the recovery display 132SG510 is finished. When the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-handed hitting promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, the predetermined area (see FIGS. 101B and 101C) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, time-saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive hits/total number of balls played 132SG454, etc.) is displayed. It is preferable to operate so that the period overlapping on the front side of the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period overlapping on the front side.

In addition, after a power outage occurs during the variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is the effect of the movable body notice in which the support portion 32b overlaps the right-hand drive promotion display 132SG430 (between the origin position and the intermediate position). On the other hand, after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during a variable display in a time-saving state, the initial action when the power is turned on overlaps with the right-hand hitting promotion display 132SG430. It is preferable that the motion is performed in a manner that does not include the presentation motion (reciprocating motion between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the movable body preview.

In addition, when a round game movable body performance is performed at the start of a round game, the initial operation when the power is turned on is an operation that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in the round game movable body performance. Preferably, the method is carried out in the following manner.

In addition, in forms 17 to 19, the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, right hit promotion display 132SG430, recovery display 132SG510, information corresponding to the time saving state (for example, production mode display 132SG221, time saving remaining display 132SG201, number of consecutive shots/total number of pitches displayed 132SG454, etc.), but in this embodiment, in the operation confirmation control, the above various displays that are actually displayed when the movable body makes the initial movement have been explained. Although we have exemplified the form in which the total overlapping times are compared, regardless of whether the above various displays are displayed or not, the time that overlaps with the display area in which the above various displays are displayed when the movable body makes its initial movement is the above. It is sufficient if there is a relationship.

Forms 21 to 24 (startup order when executing initial operation control)
In the feature section 132SG, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 (the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start or hot start), the special symbol display device 4A, Although we have exemplified a form in which the special lamps constituting 4B and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, frame on-movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit at the same time, The present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting timing of the special figure lamp when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the lighting timing of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above board movable body LED 9d, below board movable body LED 9e) , the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) may be turned on at different timings.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(G), when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, first, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 132SG500. At the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds similar to FIGS. 61 and 62) has elapsed from the start of display of the activation preparation display 132SG500, the special symbol lamps forming the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B start to light up. (See FIGS. 102(A) and (B)).

Moreover, at this timing, the power supply to the solenoids 81 and 82 is restarted, so that the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in a power-off state. In other words, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a cold start, or when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start after the power is cut off while the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state and no winnings have occurred. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and is started up with a hot start after being powered off during the interval period, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are brought into a closed state again. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state and is powered off while a winning ticket is occurring and then starts up with a hot start, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a jackpot game state and the power is cut off while the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is open and then started by hot start, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state. becomes.

After these special figure lamps are turned on and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in the power-off state, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above board movable body LED 9d, below board movable body LED 9e , the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) start lighting.

Thereafter, as an initialization notification, an initialization notification image is displayed on the image display device 5, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-panel movable body LED 9e, frame on-movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) ) after the lighting in the initialization notification mode and the output of the initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are started, as initial operation control, the on-panel movable body 32A, the under-panel movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, The confirmation operation of the chance button 631B is executed (FIGS. 102(D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state and the variable display is not being executed, when the power is cut off and the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted by a cold start, as shown in FIG. After that, first, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the timing when the start preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 transmits a power-on designation command to the production control CPU 120 (power supply by the production control CPU 120). (reception of input designation command) is performed. At this timing, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized to start lighting the special symbol lamps that constitute these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B, and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized to start the variable winning ball device. 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in the initial state (closed state).

The special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B at this time emit light in the manner in which the variable display result is a failure as the initial light emission manner, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B at this time may emit light in a manner different from variable display results other than miss or from any variable display results.

In addition, after these special lamps are lit and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are in the initial state, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above board movable body LED 9d, below board movable body LED 9e, Lighting of the frame movable body LED 9f and chance button LED 9g is started.

Then, when two seconds have elapsed since the production control CPU 120 received the power-on designation command (five seconds have elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 displays the start-up preparation display 132SG500. The display of the change notification display 132SG600 is started. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts displaying, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, panel movable body LED 9d, panel bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) emits light in the initialization notification mode. is started, and as an initial operation, a confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make it easy for the player and the staff of the game parlor where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed to recognize when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying the start-up preparation display 132SG500. This makes it possible for players and staff of the game hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed to check the lighting of the special lamps that have a high impact on the game without being distracted by the checking operations of each movable body. .

In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being performed, the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, as shown in FIG. 103(B). After that, first, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the timing when the start preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power outage recovery designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (power outage recovery by the performance control CPU 120). (Reception of recovery designation command) is performed. By energizing the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B at this timing, lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B (and variable display of the special symbol by blinking the special symbol lamps) is started. By energizing the solenoids 81 and 82, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 will be in the state before the power is cut off. In addition, when 2 seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power failure recovery designation command (5 seconds have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 displays the start preparation display 132SG500 and the recovery is resumed. Display of the middle display 132SG510 is started. After that, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit, and as an initial operation, the upper panel movable body 32A, the lower panel movable body 32B, the movable body on the frame 132SG101, and the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B are executed.

In addition, if the variable display that was being executed before the power outage stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed and a new variable display is started, the new variable display is started as shown in FIG. 103(B). At the stop timing of the variable display, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 is ended.

That is, when the number of pending memories is 0 and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the special symbol is restarted, and the resumed variable display is displayed while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed. In the case of stopping, when a new variable display is started due to the occurrence of a new starting prize, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the recovery display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 ends when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in FIG. 103(B), while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed while the variable display is being executed, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-panel movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are activated as initial operations. Confirmation operation starts.

Note that, as in FIG. 103(B), even if the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or time saving state and the variable display is being performed, the power is cut off and the image display device is started by hot start. If the variable display that has been running since before the power outage does not stop while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed in 5, as shown in FIG. After the display of the middle display 132SG510 is started, the variable display stops (at the same time, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 ends).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 103(B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or time saving state and the variable display is being performed, the power is cut off and the image display device is started by hot start. 5, even if the variable display that has been running since before the power cut is stopped while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, if there is a pending memory when the variable display is stopped, see FIG. 104(B). As shown, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and after the variable display has stopped, a new variable display is started based on the suspended memory. In this case, the display of the restoration-in-progress display 132SG510 ends at the new variable display stop timing.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 103(A) and 103(B) and FIGS. 104(A) and 104(B), background images and effect images compatible with variable display are displayed on the image display device 5. In this state, the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not started, so the background image and effect image corresponding to the variable display on the image display device 5. This makes it possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 104(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, when the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start, the variable display If it does not stop while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, panel movable body LED 9d, panel bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up and the initial operation is performed. Although an example has been given in which the above-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B are started simultaneously, the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or time saving state and the variable display is being executed, when the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start, the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed. is the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and the initial operation of the upper panel movable body 32A and the lower panel movable body. 32B, the frame movable body 132SG101, and the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B may be started at different timings.

For example, as shown in FIG. 105(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state and a variable display is being executed, when the power is cut off and the machine is started by hot start, the variable display If it does not stop while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, each time will start during the display period of the startup preparation display 132SG500 (more precisely, from 2 seconds after the production control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103). The LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are started to light up in a manner corresponding to the fact that the restoration is in progress, and the restoration is in progress display 132SG510. The confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the frame on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B may be started as an initial operation during the display period.

In addition, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being in progress, as a startup preparation indication. The process may be continued even after the display of 132SG500 ends, and may be ended at the same time as the confirmation operation of each movable body is completed, for example.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 105(A), when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the normal state or the time saving state and the variable display is being executed, when the power is cut off and the variable display is started by hot start, the variable display If the variable display stops while displaying the startup preparation display 132SG500 and a new variable display does not start, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the display of the background image corresponding to the fact that the background image is stopped is started, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-disk movable body LED 9e, frame on-movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is set to the background. What is necessary is just to light it up in the mode according to an image.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 103 to 105, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state, that is, a state where a variable display can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1. Although the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is activated has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 may experience a power outage even in a jackpot game state where variable display is not performed.

Regarding the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off in the jackpot game state and starts up with a hot start, the power cut occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is in the open state during a round game. If this occurs, as shown in FIG. 106(A), after the power is cut off, the CPU 103 will first control the effect when 3 seconds have elapsed from the timing when the startup preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed on the image display device 5. Transmission of the power failure recovery designation command to the production control CPU 120 (reception of the power failure recovery designation command by the performance control CPU 120) is performed. By energizing the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B at this timing, lighting of the special symbol lamps constituting these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B (and variable display of the special symbol by blinking the special symbol lamps) is started. By energizing the solenoids 81 and 82, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 will be in the state before the power is cut off. In other words, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state.

In addition, when 2 seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power failure recovery designation command (5 seconds have passed since the start preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 displays the start preparation display 132SG500 and the recovery is resumed. At the same time as the display of the middle display 132SG510 starts, a message is displayed in response to the fact that each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-panel movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is being restored. The lighting starts in this manner.

While the restoring display 132SG510 is being displayed thereafter, a confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is executed as an initial operation.

After the initial operation is completed and the round game ends, the special variable prize winning ball device 7 changes from the open state to the closed state in accordance with the end of the round game. Then, in response to the start of the next round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state, and the image display device 5 starts displaying an image corresponding to the round game, and each LED ( The frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the bottom movable body LED 9e, the frame top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g) start lighting in a manner corresponding to the round game.

In the example of FIG. 106(A), when a power outage occurs during a round game and the pachinko game machine is started with hot start, the round game before the power outage ends after the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as shown in FIG. In the case where the previous round game ends while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed and the next round game is started (the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the open state to the closed state and then to the open state again) , even after the startup preparation display 132SG500 has been displayed on the image display device 5, until the confirmation operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operations is completed. , the respective LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-disk movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be turned on in a manner corresponding to the fact that recovery is in progress.

As shown in FIGS. 106(A) and 106(B), when a power outage occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (during a round game) as a jackpot game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 By starting with hot start, each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, board movable body LED 9d, board bottom movable body LED 9e, frame top movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) lights up in a manner according to the round game. Since the confirmation operation of the on-panel movable body 32A, the under-panel movable body 32B, the frame on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is not executed when the When the LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED9e, the upper frame movable body LED9f, and the chance button LED9g) light up in a manner corresponding to the round game, the upper board movable body 32A, the lower board movable body 32B, the upper frame movable body 132SG101, It is possible to prevent the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B from interfering with the confirmation work to see if it is being executed normally.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 103 to 105, the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start after a power outage occurs in the normal gaming state or the time saving state has been described, but FIG. 107(A) As shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state before the power outage occurs, and while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 107(A), the performance control CPU 120 has received the power outage recovery designation command). If a game ball wins the variable prize winning ball device 6B in the open state during the 2 seconds from when the startup preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying, that is, the second startup occurs while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed. If a winning occurs, after the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the image display device 5 displays the recovery display 132SG510 until the stop timing of the variable display according to the second start win, and the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed. During the display, confirmation operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B may be started as initial operation control.

In the example shown in FIG. 107(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state before the power outage occurs, and while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 107(A), the production control CPU 120 is Although the case where a game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state during the 2 seconds from the reception of the power failure recovery designation command to the end of the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of normal symbols is being executed before the power outage occurs, and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with hot start. If a normal figure hit occurs in the middle, as shown in FIG. 107(B), as an initial operation control, check operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B is performed. What is necessary is to control the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state from the timing before the start of.

As described above, by controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. 107(A) and FIG. 107(B), the above-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 are controlled as initial operation controls. , it becomes possible to suitably execute the confirmation operation of the chance button 631B.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 107(A), after a game ball wins the variable prize winning ball device 6B in the open state, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the recovery display 132SG510, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 may be switched to the display of the recovery display 132SG510 at the timing when a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 106(A) and 106(B), regarding the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off in the jackpot gaming state and starts up with a hot start, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in the round gaming state. 108, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. ) is in the open state due to a round game in progress, a power outage occurs when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. In the example shown in 108, the special variable prize winning ball device 7 is temporarily changed from the open state to the closed state during the 2 seconds from when the production control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command until the start preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying. If the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the closed state to the open state again in the next round game, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 may start after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends. .

As described above, by controlling the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 108, it is preferable to perform the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control. It becomes possible to execute it.

In addition, in the third embodiment, a part of the fanfare performance that is started while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed is not visible to the player, and when the startup preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, the part that cannot be visually recognized is continued. While the fanfare effect is visible, in Forms 21 to 24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display started while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed is no longer visible because the recovery display is displayed. There is. In other words, in the variable display, there must be no mistakes in important information related to whether or not a jackpot is hit, so we purposely control it so that it cannot be seen, while the fanfare performance is controlled so that it cannot be seen. There is an operation direction notification part to promote this, so we purposely control it so that it can be visually recognized.

Form 25 (Relationship between initialization notification image and initial operation) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and the operation confirmation control will be described based on FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control.

In the embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start processing after a power outage occurs, a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) is elapsed after the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing. ) has passed and the CPU 103 has recovered, a power-on designation command, a gaming state background designation command (normal background), and a customer waiting demonstration designation command are transmitted. Then, based on receiving these performance control commands, the production control CPU 120 determines that the power has been turned on with initialization (started by cold start processing), and the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d , the lower panel movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the initialization notification sound (FIGS. 61 and 62). reference).

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the startup preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is hidden, and based on the gaming state background designation command (normal background), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is hidden. The first background display 132SG310 was displayed, but in this modification, when the power is turned on with initialization, the initial background display as explained in FIG. The change notification display 132SG600 is displayed.

In this case, after starting the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600, an initial operation by operation confirmation control is started, and after the initial operation is finished, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is ended. By doing this, it is possible to quickly confirm that the pachinko game machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control, and also to confirm that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control. It is possible to prevent the confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification is completed or not from being hindered.

In addition, the operation check control is performed after the power is turned on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) rather than the period after power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) until operation check control is performed. The period until this happens is longer. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to operation confirmation control being performed immediately when the power is turned on with initialization.

In addition, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds), and becomes hidden after the predetermined execution period ends, and a starting prize occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed. Even if the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden, it is preferable that the variable display is not started. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably perform operation confirmation control.

In addition, if the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the occurrence of a starting winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the display of the initialization display will continue until the end of the execution period of the variable display. It may also be done as follows. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably perform operation confirmation control.

Incidentally, if a starting winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

Furthermore, after the power is turned on without initialization (startup in hot start processing), the background display may be performed based on the gaming state background designation command without displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably perform operation confirmation control.

In addition, as in this modification, when the power is turned on with initialization (startup in cold start processing), the initial operation by operation confirmation control starts after the initialization notification display 132SG600 starts to be displayed. In the case where the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends after the initial operation is completed, as shown in FIG. is determined, the movable body notice is executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. As explained in the first embodiment, during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, not only the performance operation based on the movable body notice but also the effect display and the output of sound effects are restricted, and the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 is ended. It is only necessary to perform a performance operation based on the movable object's advance notice later.

Form 26 (operation confirmation control) <Modification>
Next, an example of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described based on FIGS. 111 to 14. FIGS. 111A to 111D are diagrams illustrating an operation example of operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. FIGS. 112A to 112D are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance operation of the win/fail button performance as a modified example.

In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 57(A) to 57(J), when the supply of power to the pachinko game machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on), the pachinko game machine 1 performs the cold start process. In the operation confirmation control executed by the production control CPU 120 based on the startup (or hot start processing), first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops (see FIG. 57(B). ), the board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the presentation position and stops (see FIG. 57(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the production position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the production position and stops at the origin position. (See FIG. 57(E)). Next, after the panel lower movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops (see FIG. 57(F)), the frame upper movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the production position and stops. (See Figure 57(G)). Next, after the frame upper movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the presentation position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 57(H)), the underboard movable body 32B moves downward from the presentation position and stops at the origin position. Then, the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 57(I)). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, about 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends, but the operation mode of each movable body varies. It can be changed to

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111(A), the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the origin position, and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the origin position. As shown in FIG. 111(B), the on-board movable body 32A as a board-side movable body is located at the production position, and the frame When the chance button 631B as a side movable body is located at the performance position, the distance L2 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is shorter.

In this modification, the above-mentioned relationship between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is such that the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A are at the origin so that their initial operation periods overlap in operation confirmation control. The movement from the position to the production position is started at the same time (see FIG. 111(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the production position and stops at the origin position so that each initial operation period does not overlap. After that (see FIG. 111(C)), the board movable body 32A may be moved upward from the presentation position and stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 111(D)).

By doing this, the first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B) can normally move to the production position, and the second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A) can normally move to the production position. It is possible to simplify the confirmation work by simultaneously confirming that the operation is possible, and at the same time, it is possible to simultaneously confirm the movement of the first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B) from the production position to the origin position, which is difficult to confirm. , it becomes possible to individually confirm the movement of the second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A) from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this modification, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each If the initial operation periods overlap, for example, during the period from when one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position until it stops at the production position, the other moves from the origin position. It is sufficient if the movement to the performance position is started. In other words, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the advancement operation periods of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A overlap.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, the lower-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position in the win/fail button performance, but the first movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A) and the second movable body (For example, the under-panel movable body 32B) may be used. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 112(A), in the win/fail button performance, when the operation promotion performance is executed during the operation validity period or when the operation validity period has passed, the on-board movable body 32A and the board In order to avoid overlapping the production operation period with the lower movable body 32B, the board movable body 32A is lowered from the origin position to the production position (see FIG. 112(B)), and the lower board movable body 32B is lowered from the origin position to the production position. It is possible to execute the effect of raising the above-board movable body 32A to 32A (see FIG. 112(C)), and then, so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap, The above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may be simultaneously moved from the production position to the origin position (see FIG. 112(D)).

As for the above-board movable body 32A and the under-board movable body 32B, which perform a production operation in which the first movable body and the second movable body contact (or overlap) in this way, in the operation confirmation control, as shown in FIG. 112(B) It is preferable to perform the initial operation in an operation mode that does not include the production operation described in (D) (for example, a mode in which the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are moved separately). By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably perform operation confirmation control.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see FIG. 2) capable of detecting that the second movable body (for example, the underboard movable body 32B) is placed at the performance position is provided, and the second movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B) is provided with a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see FIG. 2). The movement of the first movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A) toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (for example, the under-the-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134. By making it possible to perform operation confirmation control appropriately.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, in the operation confirmation control, the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are placed at the origin position before the long initial motion control is started. When the movable body is not moved to the initial position, return control (for example, short initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-disk movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform operation confirmation control.

Form 27 (operation confirmation control)
Further, as shown in FIG. 57, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening/closing door frame 3a can perform an initial operation, and the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the production position and stops at the production position (see Fig. 57(F)), the frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the production position, and then moves from the production position to the origin position. It is designed to move (see FIGS. 57(G) to (I)).

By doing this, in the operation confirmation control, the first movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B) disposed at the production position indicates that the operation confirmation control has not ended, and the first movable body (for example, By starting the operation of the second movable body (for example, the frame-top movable body 132SG101) when the board bottom movable body 32B) is placed at the production position, the second movable body (for example, the frame-top movable body 132SG101) ) operation confirmation control can be prevented from being overlooked.

Specifically, since the frame-side movable bodies such as the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and the chance button 631B can be touched by players, they are easily tampered with. Similarly to the movable body, if the movable body fails to operate normally, if the movable body on the panel side is restarted from its initial motion, the movable body on the panel side could be intentionally brought into a dead end state ( (See FIG. 113(A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 113(B), if the frame-side movable body cannot operate normally, the board-side movable body is evacuated and the frame-side movable body is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. An error image related to malfunction (for example, a caption such as "*Please check the frame movable body", etc., which will be deleted when the frame side movable body is able to operate normally) is displayed on the background image, Initial operation when determining an error up to 5 times (more times than the movable body on the panel side, and the conditions until dead end are made stricter considering that it is easier to tamper with) (Only the movable body on the frame side. The operation mode is when the power is turned on.) If the frame-side movable body cannot operate normally even after carrying out the same steps as in the previous example), only the frame-side movable body may be brought into a dead end state.

In addition, a production position sensor 132SG104 (see FIG. 2) capable of detecting that the second movable body (for example, the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101) is placed at the production position is provided, and the second movable body (for example, the frame movable body 132SG101) is provided with a production position sensor 132SG104 (see FIG. 2). The operation of the first movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B) toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the production position sensor 132SG104. By making it possible to perform operation confirmation control appropriately.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls is The loaned balls that are recirculated inside the machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the value is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a variable display and derives a specific display result as a result of the variable display so that it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A performance control means,
A movable body control means,
The movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when the power is turned on;
The performance control means is capable of performing a motion promotion performance that prompts the player to perform a motion during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the movement promotion effect is executed;
a second part that is executed after the first part and in which the result of the movement promotion effect is notified;
It consists of
The movable body control means includes:
The confirmation movement control can be performed using a first movement control pattern in which the movable body is moved for a first period, and a second movement control pattern in which the movable body is moved in a second period shorter than the first period. can be,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the variable display ends before the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern starts, and then the power is turned on, the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern is in progress. The movable body may be controlled so that the confirmation movement control is completed before the second part is started by performing the confirmation movement control in the second movement control pattern .
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images